JP6900114B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) and a rotating body type game machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

A gaming machine typified by a pachinko machine or the like is known to be equipped with a vibration motor that vibrates an effect operating unit that can be operated by a player (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-279530

However, in the effect operation unit described in Patent Document 1 , the effect operation unit and the vibration source are separately provided, and how to efficiently transmit the vibration transmitted from the vibration source to the player is determined. There was room for improvement in terms of points.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently transmitting vibration generated by a vibration source to a player.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
In a gaming machine provided with a main body frame, a door frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame, and an effect operation unit provided on the door frame.
As the effect operation unit, a first effect operation unit and a second effect operation unit are provided.
The second production operation unit is
It is possible to operate it on the circumference by the operation by the player, and a part of it is located on the player side of the first effect operation unit in the initial state.
It is possible to vibrate the second effect operation unit, and the second effect operation unit is provided with a vibration source that moves according to the operation by the player.
The second effect operation unit is operated by the player from the initial state on the circumference with the vibration source, and then operates on the circumference with the vibration source to return to the initial state. And
The first effect operation unit is a pressing operation unit that can be operated in a straight line by an operation by a player, unlike the operation of the second effect operation unit.
Said vibration source and said second staging operation unit and the first staging operation unit, Ri detachable der respect integrated with the door frame as an operating unit,
Further, the gaming machine is characterized in that the vibration source is arranged on the inner surface of a member that the player directly contacts among the members constituting the second effect operation unit.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently transmitting the vibration generated by the vibration source to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It shows another form, and is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. FIG. 36B (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX. It is a cross-sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 37A including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partially enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line nullification member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional plan view which includes the partially enlarged view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line invalidating member, and (b) is a sectional plan view of the foul cover unit. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) and (b) are an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 37G showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 37G showing a state in which an illegal ball is prevented from reversing. .. It is a top view of the foul cover unit. It is a top view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a vertical sectional front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the foul ball passes. (A) and (b) are enlarged views of the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A) and (b) show the state in which the operation line invalidation member is electrified, and are enlarged views corresponding to the Z portion of FIG. 37K showing the state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the main part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 102. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 102. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 108. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 114. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 122 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. 125. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 128. Following FIG. 129, it is a flowchart showing the payout control unit main process and the payout control unit power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball squeeze determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stock monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout ball operation determination setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere motion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error release operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from a CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection abnormality determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a block diagram of the 2nd Embodiment which shows the control structure of the pachinko machine schematicly. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in a game machine. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of embodiment. It is a figure which shows the operating state of a magnetic sensor and each transistor in a tabular form. It is a figure which shows the circuit structure in the case where a plurality of sensor signal input units connected to each of a plurality of magnetic detection sensors are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor of the detection circuit unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows an example (Example 4) in which the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows another example (Example 5) which arranged the detection circuit part of the magnetic sensor input circuit on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 6) in which the avoidance part and the detection circuit part of a magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the example (Example 7) in which the voltage output part of the magnetic sensor input circuit, the avoidance part, and the detection circuit part are arranged on the main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic structure of the electrical connection of a detection sensor part, a panel relay board, and a main control board. It is a front view which shows each example of the arrangement position in the gaming machine of a panel relay board and a main control board schematically. It is a figure which shows the arrangement example of the avoidance part unit with respect to a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the vibration generation source in a game machine, and the arrangement example of a panel relay board and a main control board. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the basic structure of the electrical connection about the origin position detection sensor for detecting the origin position of a peripheral control board, a drive board, a drive means, and a movable effect body. It is a front view which conceptually showed a plurality of movable accessories for production provided in a game machine, and grouping of a plurality of movable accessories. 6 is a timing chart showing an example of a case where a plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01 are restored to the initial positions. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by a fixed channel system. It shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for realizing the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows the relationship with the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the search process of an empty channel at the time of performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of a free channel search process. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern of the sound control by each channel system or a combination thereof. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the free channel search processing in the case of executing the control which outputs the sound of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the condition which selects the channel which exchanges a sound output (stops a sound reproduction) when a channel is not vacant at the time of output of a new sound in this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the production example for explaining the sound control of this embodiment, (A) shows the timing when a sound effect is reproduced, (B) shows the channel which each sound effect is output. It is a figure which shows an example of the priority order of the sound effect in the production example of this embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the volume change of a sound effect in the first half variation of this embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of a directing sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each staging sound effect. It is a figure which shows the screen composition example of the effect in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the composition table of the reproduction channel in the sound source control in the modification of this embodiment. It is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modification of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. It is a block diagram which shows the earth system of a game machine. It is a perspective view of the payout base unit provided with the earth circuit board seen from diagonally rearward. It is a perspective view of the storage case part containing the earth circuit board seen from above. It is a circuit diagram of a ground circuit board. It is a figure for demonstrating the fixing mode of a ball tank. It is a perspective view which showed the inside by cutting open a part of the rotation operation part in the modification of this embodiment. It is a top view which showed the inside by cutting out a part of the rotation operation part in the modification of this embodiment. (A) is a plan view showing a modified example of the member provided in the base portion 221 of the ball lending operation unit 220, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line BB in (a). c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). (A) and (b) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (c) schematically show the cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). Is. (A) schematically shows a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). (A) to (c) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (d) schematically show the cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (b). Is. (A) to (d) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (e) schematically show the cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (c). Is. The members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 are schematically shown. (A) and (b) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (c) schematically show the cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (b). It is a thing. (A) schematically shows a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view cut along the line AA in (a). FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 6 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a modified example of a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223. The plan view which shows the deformation example of the member near the ball lending operation base 223 is schematically shown. The plan view which shows the deformation example of the member near the ball lending operation base 223 is schematically shown.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIGS. 10A and 10B are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 on the lower side of the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 for reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. The control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be attached to. The back unit 3000 is provided with a back effect unit 3100 capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, it is provided with a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 for granting a predetermined number of game balls B). Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the large winning opening 2005 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or a movable effect is performed by the back effect unit 3100. It is possible to entertain the player by performing a light emitting effect.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 182 while the game balls are stored in the upper plate 201, which will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received by the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of game balls are opened for balls by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning openings. Is paid out to the upper plate 201.

If the strength of the game ball that cannot reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball, that is, the game ball launched with a weak firing force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. 10A, FIG. As shown in FIG. 37A, the ball falls into the foul ball drop port 1013 provided between the end (end) of the launch rail 544 and the end (start) of the outer rail 1001, which is returned later. It is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4.
Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 with a weak firing force and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, and at the same time. This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear.
The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions formed in a quadrangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of rear piece portions facing each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting guide path 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball hitting supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and stays on the partition portion 143a (a state of staying in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). The state) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 102) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. There is. Here, disabling the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting or pinching (pinching and stopping), entwining (winding), or adhering with hot melt or the like. It means to put it in a state.

The operation line invalidation member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and is separated vertically at a substantially center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. Inclined portions 703 formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip side (right end side in front view) of the portions 701 and the second piece portion 702 and the sides of the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 facing each other. And have. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidation member 700 is bent so that the right end in the front view protrudes rearward with respect to the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700 in FIG. 35 (a). On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same surface as the flat plate surface of the operation line invalidation member 700. As a result, in a plan view, the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

When the operation line invalidation member 700 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, a V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is formed in the ball striking supply port 142a. It will be in a state of communication with.

According to the operation line invalidation member 700, an illegal ball (game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having almost the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540, and is projected to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When the operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as causing an illegal ball to be taken in and out of the first starting port 2002 or the like is performed, the ball launching device 540 plays a game. The operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the fraudulent ball launched (struck) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Then, it can be cut like scissors by the narrowed part of the shearing part 700v formed by the first piece part 701 and the second piece part 702, and thus the operation line is invalidated and the illegal ball is used. It is possible to deter the fraudulent activity that was being carried out.
The first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraudulent activity, the metal plate may be bent into a form different from the above, or the bent operation line nullifying member 700 may be formed. It may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided in place of the metal plate.
When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, the metal game ball at the standby position (on the partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is of a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). By detecting with a sensor and adding the detection signal to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, it is possible to prevent the firing of an illegal ball itself. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive the ball feeding.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36A and 36B. 36A (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36A (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 36B (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 36B (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is launched by the ball launching device 540 with a force weaker than a predetermined force (launching force that can reach the game area 5a) (launching force that cannot reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is launched. The purpose is to guide the game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside to the lower plate 202, and to guide the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. ..
As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.
The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and is the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 211a which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is possible to communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a that communicates with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the penetrating ball passage 150a in the front view. It is equipped with a full tank ball receiving port 150b.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is open upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, the momentum is insufficient. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a foul ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right. The game ball B, which is open forward near the lower corner and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball of the dish unit 200. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball discharge port 150d, and a communication passage 150h connecting the ball discharge port 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. The connecting passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i arranged below the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately 1 game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. It consists of a lower passage wall 150j arranged in parallel at intervals of one piece, the starting end opens upward to the downwardly inclined end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ending portion is a storage passage 150e. It opens downward with respect to.
A series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the connecting passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned. It is a passage, and the return passage portion 1014 is formed by these series of elements.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud caused by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and is also provided with the launch rail 544 and the outside. The foul ball drop port 1013 established between the rails 1001 is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as a third fraud prevention means.

The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, which is enlarged in FIG. 37B. As shown in the figure, the convex portions 7001 on both sides are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 cover and accommodate the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.
The specific operation line invalidation member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidation member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece portion 701 of FIG. 35. The first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702 open in the direction facing the flow direction of the ball in the connecting passage 150h. A V-shaped sheared portion 7000v is formed.
In the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37B, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidation member 7000 constitutes the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and is directed toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A tapered guide portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width required for the game ball to flow down the upper surface thereof, and is directed toward the lid member 152 side at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The width narrows toward the sheared portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side and the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second inclined portion 150 kb having a narrowed tip shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a tapered guide portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, slides into the guide portion 150k in a winding shape, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the first inclined portion 150ka to become the first. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 by sliding the second inclined portion 150 kb. As a result, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul ball and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In addition, in order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150 ka and the second inclined portion 150 kb of the guide portion 150 k may be formed in a curved shape.

Since the second operation line invalidating member 7000 provided on the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is provided by using the space communicating from the lower plate ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is allowed to enter the game area 5a, and the operation line L protruding from the lower plate ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, or to be illegal. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as moving the ball Q in and out of the first starting port or the like.
For example, a fraudulent act such as pushing the fraudulent ball Q into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c using a special tool such as a cell plate, causing it to flow backward, and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). When "A") is performed, when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and heads for the launch position of the launch rail 544, Pulled by it (tension is applied), the operation line L wraps around in a U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidation member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020, and finally cuts. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated, so that it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the foul ball is intentionally made into a foul ball to be a foul ball, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as "cheating act B") is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled (tension is applied) by the subsequent firing of the illegal ball Q and is operated. L is pressed against the folded-back portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. It will be possible. It should be noted that FIGS. 37A and 37B are explanatory views assuming a case where a fraudulent act B is performed. Further, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like, which is the first fraud prevention means, cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, it becomes a foul ball). Even if the fraud ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means), so this embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention means. It also has the effect of Therefore, when targeting fraudulent activity B, the operation line invalidating member 700, 7000, which is the first and second fraud prevention means, and the operation line invalidating member 7000H, which is the third fraud prevention means described later. , 7000S is preferably used in combination as appropriate, and one unit of the first operation line invalidation member 700 and another second operation line invalidation member 7000 or the third operation line invalidation member 7000H, 7000S. It is recommended to install it together with the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line invalidation member 700 and the second operation line invalidation member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside, so that they are inconspicuous, and therefore ball clogging or the like. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble of, it is difficult for fraud countermeasure information to be leaked. Further, since the operation line invalidation members 700 and 7000 have a decrease in sharpness and the like affect the crime prevention performance, it is easy to maintain the crime prevention performance if they are replaced together with the door frame 3.

By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v to invalidate the operation line L, but sandwich the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022, and the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled or is difficult to push or pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. It may be invalidated as follows.

Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 37C and 37D, the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by the shaded portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 37C, and the metal plates 7011, The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as a holding portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidation member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, the unit body 151 is made so that it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And it is covered and accommodated from the outside by the lid member 152.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 37D, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When wrapping around the folded-back portion in a U-turn shape, the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 are guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded-back portion, and the holding portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion of the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 It is pinched and pinched by 7044 like tweezers.
As a result, the fraudulent ball Q that has flowed back from the lower plate ball supply port 211c due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act A reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the fraudulent ball Q that is intentionally made into a foul ball by the fraudulent act B. It becomes possible to suppress the arrival of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the ball, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidation member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, it only loosens there, and as a result, the amount of extension of the operation line L cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging in the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to deter fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q.
In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tips of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is used as the sandwiching portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surfaces, and the tip portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). ), And the sandwiching width portion of both plate surfaces may be the sandwiching portion 7044. As a result, it is possible to improve the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate while achieving the same effect as the above-mentioned fraud deterrent effect.

Further, although not shown, the operation line invalidation member 7000 that sandwiches the operation line L is provided with a double-sided tape in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 37D, or is filled with an adhesive having a property of not curing. Then, the adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000 for sandwiching the operation line L is changed from the above-mentioned one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. 37E, and this coil spring is replaced with a coil spring. It may be installed and formed so that the guiding direction of the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k and its own central axis are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and is sandwiched.
Note that coil springs that have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, need to be installed in a compressed state, such as compression coil springs. Compared to this, it is advantageous in terms of installation work.
Further, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied, but as shown in FIG. 37E, the coil spring is installed by being curved in a direction in which the coils on the approach side of the operation line L are slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly.
When the operation line nullification member 7000 is formed of the coil spring in this way, it can be manufactured at low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidation member 7000 from the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidation member 7000. Further fraudulent work is conceivable, but in order to deal with this, in the above-described embodiment, the course change portion of the return passage portion 1014 of the foul ball (in this embodiment, the portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c). A slit 1015 is formed in the cell plate (foreign matter) into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters (see FIG. 37A). As a result, it is possible to prevent further illicit work in which a foreign object is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k. As a countermeasure against illegal work in which a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted through the ball opening (lower plate ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted as in the slit 1015 described above. Not limited to the one that forms the intake port, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 37A, a configuration in which a protruding obstacle portion 1016 is provided to prevent foreign matter such as a cell plate from colliding with the guide portion 150k. As a result, a higher degree of fraud prevention may be achieved.

Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that waits for the entry of the operation line L and invalidates the members. As shown in FIGS. 37N and 37P, a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

37K, 37L, and 37M show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). It is swingably attached to the course change portion (corner portion corresponding to directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c).

That is, in FIG. 37K, the operation line invalidation member 7000D has a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped invalidating portion 2646 projecting vertically to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion. It has a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the 2645 and the invalidation portion 2646 intersect, and an arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 projecting to the right from the upper edge of the invalidation portion 2646. The support shaft 2649 planted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated by about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 37L (a). It can swing to the release posture of b). Further, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2650 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the invalidating portion 2646 with the shaft hole 2647 sandwiched between them, and the ball receiving portion is urged by the balance weight 2650. The ball receiving posture shown in FIG. 37L (a) is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load of one game ball) acts on the ball receiving portion 2645, while the load of one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. When acted, it swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b).
Further, the end edge of the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is an intersection side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014), and is an operation line. When the invalidating member 7000D swings to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b), the intersection side portion 2651 is fitted into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the connecting passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. 37L (a). Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward at the course changing section, the ball is placed on the ball receiving section 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37L (b). Then, the foul ball resting on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is released to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidation member 7000D released from the foul ball urges the balance weight 2650. It returns to the original ball receiving posture.
In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time, but even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the later foul ball is as shown in FIG. 37L (b). It is stopped by the arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648, and the operation line invalidation member 7000D is reactivated before being continuously processed. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated at the same time, they can be processed one by one without any problem.

Next, the foul cover unit 150 provided with the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D is connected to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is launched from the ball hitting supply port 142a. By intentionally firing the illegal ball weakly, it is made into a foul ball and taken out from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball, and further, the operation line L connected to the illegal ball is grasped and the subsequent illegal ball is performed. When the fraudulent ball Q (a fraudulent act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a) flows in, the fraudulent ball Q flows down the connecting passage 150h as shown in FIG. 37M (a), and the course is changed downward at the course change section. Immediately after the change, the ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullification member 7000D rotates counterclockwise around the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. 37M (b). At this time, the invalidation portion 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side portion 2651 of the end edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side, but the intersection side portion 2651 When crossing the foul ball return passage, the operation line L passing through the passage naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. 37M (b) and cannot move. (Pinch). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for the ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.
If the operation line L is meandered between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 to make it difficult for the operation line L to reverse, it is in a state of being captured by the operation line invalidation member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hit ball supply port 142a side. As a result, the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidation member 7000D can be stored and recovered as a evidence ball.

The above-mentioned dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q, but the operation line invalidation member 7000D is operated by an electric drive means as shown in FIG. 37N. May be good.
That is, in the operation line invalidation member 7000D of FIG. 37N, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653, which is an electric drive means, is connected to the portion provided with the balance weight 2650, and the ball detector is connected to the invalidation unit 2646 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and it is detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises and the operation line invalidating member 7000D changes from the ball receiving posture to the release posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving unit 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655 (the signal changes from the presence of the game ball to the absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 descends to operate the operation line. The invalidation member 7000D is adapted to return from the release position to the ball receiving position.
When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by the change of the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 receives the change. In order to operate appropriately, foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line nullification member 7000D using its own weight.
On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646 as described above, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the emission signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the ascending position. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, fraudulent ball Q can be prevented.

The dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidation portion 2646. be able to. Further, since the operation line invalidation member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the illegal ball Q from entering from the opening side of the ball while the ball receiving portion 2645 is blocking the return passage portion 104, the illegal ball described later will be described. It can also be used as a measure to prevent reverse movement. Therefore, it exhibits a higher fraud prevention function.
In addition to the above configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D is formed with, for example, a shutter plate structure in which the invalidation portion linearly advances and retreats to open and close the connecting passage 150h, and the tip of the shutter plate is formed. Is a crossing side that crosses the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the connecting passage 150h and downstream of the movable area of the crossing side, and the movable area of the crossing side is set. The illegal ball Q after passing is detected by the ball detector to activate the invalidation unit, and the operation line L is pinched or cut at the intersection crossing the connecting passage 150h. You may.
Further, the dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidation member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operating line nullifying member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be surely enhanced.

Further, FIG. 37P is a dynamic operation line invalidation member 7000D, which winds up and invalidates the operation line L.
That is, the operation line invalidation member 7000D is a square ring-shaped invalidation portion 2646 mounted in the connecting passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate about a rotation shaft 2656 in a direction orthogonal to the passage. The motor 2657, which is an electric drive means for rotating the invalidation portion 2646, and the horizontal bar crossing the connecting passage 150h of the invalidation portion 2646 are used as the intersection side portion 2651, and are downstream from the movable (rotation) region of the intersection side portion 2651. The ball detector 2655 is provided in the above, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.
When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the connecting passage 150h and passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. When detected by the vessel 2655, the invalidation unit 2646 spins once, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the ball opening.
On the other hand, when the fraudulent ball Q due to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidation member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the fraudulent ball Q goes under the invalidation unit 2646. In order to pass through the conversion unit 2646, when the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L winds around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the fraudulent ball Q stops within the connecting passage 150h, there is no risk of it falling into the hands of a fraudulent person.
The ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q, and in such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidation member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above.

As described above, the description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line nullification member includes the following technical ideas.
"A game area where you play with a game ball, and
A ball launcher that launches a game ball,
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage that communicates with the game area from the launch position of the ball launcher.
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening opened in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine.
Equipped with fraud prevention means that can prevent the operation of the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from the front of the machine.
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that clamps, cuts, or winds the operation line to invalidate it.
The operation line nullification member includes an intersection side portion of the game ball that crosses the foul ball return passage, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball has passed through the movable area of the intersection side portion to operate the foul ball. A gaming machine characterized in that it is designed to cross a return passage, and thus the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage is pinched, cut, or wound up at the intersection to invalidate the operation line. "

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10A, 10B, 37A, 37I, and 37J, the third fraud prevention means provided at the foul ball drop port 1013 is the end (termination) of the launch rail 544. The operation line invalidation member 7000H provided on the part) and the operation line invalidation member 7000S provided on the end portion (specifically, the resin rail base 1001x) of the outer rail 1001.

The operation line nullification member 7000H provided at the protruding end of the launch rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is combed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. It is covered with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.
Therefore, as described above, an illegal act such as pushing the illegal ball Q from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the return passage portion 1014 using a special tool such as a cell plate to cause the illegal ball Q to flow backward and send it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the launch rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the launch position, it is pulled by it (tension is applied) and the operation line L becomes the operation line invalidation member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.
Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and the foul ball is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. Even when a fraudulent act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is used. Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wire rods in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. 10A, 37A and 37I. It's a rush.
According to the operation line invalidation member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively hangs in a state where it reaches the game area 5a and is connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower plate ball supply port which is an opening for a ball. Even if an illegal person is grasping through 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside in order to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L becomes the wire rods of the operation line invalidation member 7000S due to the tension. After that, even if the force of the hand operating the operation line L is loosened in order to lower the illegal ball Q, the operation line L is hard to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidation member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, as a result, fraudulent acts using the fraudulent ball Q can be suppressed.

As described above, as the third fraud prevention means, the operation line invalidation member 7000H on the launch rail 544 side is effective at the initial stage of the fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullification member 7000S on the side exerts its effect, a higher fraud prevention effect can be obtained.
Of course, it is also possible to use either one of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and 7000S alone, and a specific invalidation member of the operation line invalidation member 7000H and the operation line invalidation member 7000S is also implemented. The forms may be exchanged with each other, or the same invalidating member may be adopted.
Further, in addition to the case where the operation line invalidation members 7000H and 7000S are made into separate parts and attached to the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in the embodiment, for example, the metal plate constituting the launch rail 544 is appropriately processed to invalidate the operation line. The chemical member 7000H is integrally formed, or the wire rod is integrally formed on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or the V groove is formed on the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 10B. The shape of the pinching portion 7000Sv may be engraved and the operation line L may be attracted to the depth of the groove of the pinching portion 7000Sv to be pinched.
Furthermore, the operation line invalidation member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line invalidation member 7000 as shown in FIG. 37J, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described with reference to FIGS. 37C and 37D. , 7022, and the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001 may be provided with a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150 ka and a second inclined portion 150 kb.

As described above, with respect to the embodiment in which the second operation line invalidating member 7000 for invalidating the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014, and also the third operation line invalidating member 7000 is fouled. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, of course.
For example, in the above embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h, that is, at the entrance portion of the connecting passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the connecting passage 150h (see arrow z in FIG. 37A), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 36B (a), or outside the foul ball drop port 1013. The operation line L is a portion where the operation line L abuts on a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is the weight of the illegal ball Q or the like. It may be provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it tries to be stretched straight by receiving a tension due to a pulling force by an illegal person. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidation member 7000 of the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if the player inserts the fingertip through the opening for the ball, and this position is the safety aspect of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of the crime prevention aspect that makes it difficult to illegally work on the chemical member 7000 itself.

Further, in the embodiment, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided so as to be offset to one side of the connecting passage 150h, but as shown in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the operation line invalidation member 7000 is provided to fill the passage width. The cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the starting end portion of the connecting passage 150h are made into a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. It is designed not to touch. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line invalidation member 7000 uses a well-known folding blade structure or a chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and with the unit main body 151. If the loading port 1019 and the discharging port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is extruded in an elaborate manner so that the old and new can be exchanged, sharp sharpness can always be maintained.
In addition, in FIGS. 37F (a) and 37F, reference numeral 1021 is a pinching secant line portion for the operation line L cut into the valley portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L is provided on the pinching secant line portion 1021. It is designed to bite into it. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the pinching secant line portion 1021 such as the bottom wall 150 g, so that the certainty of fraud prevention is ensured. Is improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown, but there is also a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In the case of, the fraudulent act of invading the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached into the game area 5a by using the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port (opening for the ball) to the game area 5a (the fraudulent act A, described above There is a risk of fraudulent activity similar to B). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in the space communicating from the upper plate ball supply port to the gaming area 5a, as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with one second fraud prevention means, but a plurality of second fraud prevention means may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (each of the folded portions) has a second such as the above-described embodiment. The fraud prevention means of 2 may be provided. This makes it possible to further enhance the deterrent effect of fraudulent activity using the fraudulent ball Q.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided with a metal plate as a second fraud prevention means, but a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may have a special shape so as to function as a second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150 g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the connecting passage 150h. A slit-shaped catching portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014 so that the operation line L can be captured in the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the shaped guide portion 150k. The operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q may be sandwiched by the catching portion which is the narrowest portion of the guiding portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same fraud deterrent effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the fraudulent ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidation member 7000. In 37G, 37H, and 37K, an illegal ball that prevents the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening (prevents the reverse / reverse flow of the illegal ball Q) without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. By providing a reverse movement prevention means, fraud due to the fraudulent ball Q is prevented.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 37G, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into the course change part (the part directly above the lower plate ball supply port 211c) of the return passage part 1014. Not only that, it can be exemplified that the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the fraudulent ball Q itself to another passage and blocking the movement is provided (first fraudulent ball reversal prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A in which the fraudulent ball Q is regurgitated without affecting the flow of a normal foul ball. In addition, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction in which the backflowing illegal ball Q enters the attracting portion 1022 at the inlet portion of the attracting portion 1022 (allowing the invasion into the attracting portion 1022 and from the attracting portion 1022 A one-sided valve that makes it impossible to leave the ball (not shown) may be provided, whereby a trace of using the fraudulent ball Q and evidence of cheating can be left.
Further, as shown in FIG. 37H, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the backflow (backflow) of the illegal ball Q. Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of regurgitating the fraudulent ball Q such as the above-mentioned fraudulent act A without affecting the flow of the normal foul ball. The operation line nullification member 7000D shown in FIG. 37K is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.
Further, of course, the static operation line invalidation member and the dynamic operation line invalidation member described above may have both of them.

Further, in the above embodiment, an operation line invalidation member different from the first operation line invalidation member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014, but such an operation line invalidation member is provided, for example, a foul ball drop port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position and the launch position, or between the foul ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer side of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, it detects static electricity acting on the handle 182 or the like of the player and applies the static electricity to the handle 182 or the like of the player. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall up and down so that the game ball B can be discharged. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5c-2. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the loaned game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit 226 arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit 226 when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 after removing the upper plate ball. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiing guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is urged upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front of each. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

Since the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302, the effect operation unit 300 is viewed from above. , Liquids such as coffee and juice and powdery objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter as foreign substances. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the effect operation unit 300 may malfunction, a gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, or a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. If a foreign object is caught in the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the rotation operation unit 302, or the like may not move smoothly. Therefore, a drain hole 311a is formed in the unit lower cover 311 as a mechanism for discharging these foreign substances from the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

Although a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, members constituting the pachinko machine 1 such as the lower plate 202 are not provided directly under some of the drain holes 311a, and foreign matter is discharged from these drain holes 311a. If so, it will fall directly onto the mounting surface of the island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted. With such a configuration, the foreign matter discharged from the drain hole 311a can be kept away from the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being polluted by the discharged foreign matter. Become.

In the present embodiment, the lower plate 202 and other members constituting the pachinko machine 1 are not provided directly under the drain hole 311a, but the lower plate 202 is located directly under the drain hole 311a. May be good. With such a configuration, since the liquid stays in the lower plate 202, it is possible to prevent the mounting surface of the island equipment on which the pachinko machine 1 is mounted from being soiled.

The unit lower cover 311 is made of an opaque polycarbonate resin having a thickness of about 2 mm. With such a configuration, even if the foreign matter that could not be discharged by the drain hole 311a remains around the drain hole 311a inside the unit lower cover 311, its existence cannot be confirmed from the appearance, so that the appearance is aesthetically pleasing. It is possible to prevent the decline.

On the other hand, the unit lower cover 311 may be formed of a transparent resin so that the inside can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, when foreign matter enters the effect operation unit 300 from above and foreign matter flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the door frame 3 is opened and the dish unit 200 is removed from the door frame 3. Further, it is possible that a foreign substance has entered the effect operation unit 300 by observing from the outside without the trouble of removing the effect operation unit 300 from the plate unit 200 and checking the internal condition of the effect operation unit 300. , The discharge status of foreign matter through the drain hole 311a and the retention status of foreign matter in the unit lower cover 311 can be confirmed. It is possible to appropriately perform measures such as cleaning and parts replacement in 1.

Although the embodiment in which the drain hole 311a is provided in the unit lower cover 311 is shown, the drain hole 311a may not be provided. Even with such a configuration, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained both when the unit lower cover 311 is formed of an opaque resin or when it is formed of a transparent resin. In addition, by not providing the drainage hole 311a, it is possible to prevent the player from performing mischief or harassment by inserting a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire into the drainage hole 311a from below. Is possible.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape as if the lower cover 311 of the unit is hollowed out in a columnar shape. With such a configuration, when a liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 as a foreign substance from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the resistance of the liquid passing through the drain hole 311a is reduced, and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to quickly discharge to the outside. Further, when a solid such as cigarette ash enters the effect operation unit 300 as a foreign substance from above and flows down to the unit lower cover 311, the solid passing through the drain hole 311a is prevented from staying in the drain hole 311a. This makes it possible to quickly discharge the pachinko machine 1 to the outside.

Although the embodiment is shown in which the drainage hole 311a is linearly formed in a shape such that the unit lower cover 311 is hollowed out in a columnar shape, the drainage hole 311a may be formed in such a non-linear shape. For example, the shape of the drain hole may be curved in an arc shape or an S shape. With such a configuration, it is a member provided in the production operation unit 300 from mischief and harassment by the player such as inserting a thin metal wire such as a wire or a piano wire into the drain hole 311a from below. It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like.

The drain hole 311a is formed in a shape as if the lower cover 311 of the unit is hollowed out in a columnar shape, but the diameter thereof is about 2 mm. The drainage hole 311a is provided to discharge the foreign matter that has entered the effect operation unit 300, but it is necessary to keep in mind that mischief and harassment by the player such as inserting the foreign matter into the drainage hole 311a are performed. There is. The foreign matter to be inserted includes the player's own finger (about 15-20 mm in diameter), a game ball (about 11 mm in diameter), a cigarette (about 8 mm in diameter), and a thin metal wire (diameter 0.2-) such as a wire or piano wire. (About 2 mm) is assumed. In order to prevent the insertion of these foreign substances, it is desirable that the diameter of the drain hole 311a is smaller than the diameter of these foreign substances. On the other hand, when the diameter of the drain hole 311a is reduced, the influence of the surface tension of the liquid flowing down into the unit lower cover 311 becomes a size that cannot be ignored, and the efficiency of discharging the liquid from the drain hole 311a may decrease. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the drain hole 311a is set to about 2 mm.

Among the above-mentioned foreign substances that are expected to be inserted, the player's finger, the game ball, and the cigarette can be impulsively inserted into the drain hole 311a without requiring prior preparation. On the other hand, thin metal wires such as wires and piano wires cannot be inserted into the drain hole 311a unless the player normally carries them around and brings them to the hall in a planned manner. It is considered that the possibility that the player's finger, the game ball, and the cigarette are inserted is relatively higher than the possibility that such a situation occurs. Therefore, as a countermeasure against a situation in which a player's finger, a game ball, or a cigarette is inserted accidentally, the diameter of the drain hole 311a may be set to less than 8 mm. With such a configuration, the vibration speaker 354, which is a member provided in the production operation unit 300, is prevented from mischief and harassment such as inserting a player's finger, a game ball, and a cigarette into the drain hole 311a from below. , The operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, and the like can be protected.

An example in which the shape of the drainage hole 311a is columnar is shown, but the shape of the drainage hole 311a is not limited to the columnar shape, and has a shape such as a slit shape, a taper shape, or a quadrangle such as a square or a rectangle. May be good. Even with these shapes, by making the width of the narrowest part of the drainage hole 311a less than 8 mm, mischief and harassment such as inserting a player's finger, a game ball, and a cigarette into the drainage hole 311a can be prevented. It is possible to protect the vibration speaker 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation unit relay board unit 390, etc., which are members provided in the effect operation unit 300.

The drainage hole 311a is formed in a shape as if the lower cover 311 of the unit is hollowed out in a columnar shape. However, when the effect operation unit 300 including the lower cover 311 of the unit is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the drainage hole 311a is formed. It is in a state of being inclined so that it is located backward as it goes downward. In this embodiment, it is inclined only backward at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the rear. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing on the clothes of the player who is sitting on the chair and playing the game. Further, when the player is not playing the game, it is possible to prevent the liquid from splashing on the seating portion of the chair. Further, when a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the water pressure applied to the drain hole 311a becomes stronger, and the liquid vigorously toward the rear side. Will be discharged, and it will be possible to further enhance the effect of suppressing the liquid from splashing on the clothes of the player.

Although the embodiment is shown in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as it goes downward, the drainage hole 311a may be formed so as not to provide the inclination. With such a configuration, the drop position of the liquid discharged from the drain hole 311a is limited to just below the drain hole 311a, so that the pachinko machine 1 is mounted on the mounting surface of the island facility. It is possible to easily predict the drop position of the liquid in the above, and it is possible to easily take measures against the drop of the liquid.

Although the embodiment is shown in which the drainage hole 311a is tilted so as to be positioned rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward, the drainage hole 311a may be tilted so as to be positioned forward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the front. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 or the ball tray in each machine counting system.

Although the embodiment is shown in which the drainage hole 311a is tilted so as to be positioned rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward, the drainage hole 311a may be tilted so as to be located rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the left. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling onto the hands of the player who operates the dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, the ball tray in each machine counting system, and the handle 182. It becomes possible to do.

Although the embodiment is shown in which the drainage hole 311a is tilted so as to be positioned rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward, the drainage hole 311a may be tilted so as to be located rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward. In this case, when the liquid is discharged as a foreign substance from the drain hole 311a, the liquid is discharged with momentum toward the right. With such a configuration, a dollar box placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a ball tray in each machine counting system, a machine machine generally installed on the left side of the pachinko machine 1, and each machine counting system. It is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the pachinko machine.

An embodiment in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined so as to be positioned rearward as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward, and a state in which the drainage hole 311a is inclined so as to be located forward, left, and right as the drainage hole 311a is directed downward. Although the modified example is shown, the drainage hole 311a may be tilted in a direction in which the front-rear direction and the left-right direction are combined. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from falling to the player, the amusement park facility, or the like. For example, when the drain hole 311a is tilted so as to be positioned forward to the left as it goes downward, the player's right hand operating the handle 182, the dollar box, the ball tray in each machine counting system, and the machine between the machines. , It is possible to prevent the liquid from falling into the flow path connecting the ball tray and the inter-table machine in each unit counting system.

In the present embodiment, a plurality (specifically, eight) of drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311. With such a configuration, even if a part of the drainage hole 311a is clogged with foreign matter that has flowed down or is blocked by a player from the outside with gum, the drainage hole 311a can be discharged. It becomes possible to secure it.

Although a plurality (specifically, eight) drain holes 311a are provided below the unit lower cover 311, only one drain hole 311a may be provided. With such a configuration, since the drop position of the liquid is limited as compared with the case where a plurality of drain holes 311a are provided, it is possible to reduce the area of the amusement park facility that becomes dirty due to the drop of the liquid.

In the present embodiment, a plurality (specifically, eight) of drainage holes 311a are provided below the spherical unit lower cover 311 which is convex downward, but four at the lowermost end and an intermediate height. There are two different heights, two above, and so on. With such a configuration, when the amount of liquid flowing into the inside of the unit lower cover 311 is small, the liquid is discharged only from the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end. Since the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end are close to each other and the drop position of the liquid is limited, it is possible to prevent the amusement park facility from becoming dirty due to the drop of the liquid. On the other hand, when the amount of liquid that has flowed in is large and a large amount of liquid has accumulated inside the unit lower cover 311, two drain holes 311a provided at an intermediate height and further provided above 2 The liquid is also discharged from the two drain holes 311a. In this case, it is possible to increase the amount of liquid discharged per unit time as compared with the case where the liquid is discharged using the four drain holes 311a at the lowermost end.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper part is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

Since the main body portion 321 is attached so that its upper portion is inclined forward, the liquid flowing into the bottom wall 321a flows down on the bottom wall 321a and moves forward. A plurality (specifically, three) of the through holes 321b are provided at the front end of the bottom wall 321a, and the liquid that has moved forward is discharged from the through holes 321b, and the unit lower cover 311 Fall towards. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a and the vibrating speaker 354 breaks down.

Although the embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a is shown, a motor for driving / vibration generation, a decorative board on which an LED is mounted, and a dish unit relay board 214 are shown instead of the vibration speaker 354. A board box 391 or the like in which the operation unit relay board 392 for relaying the signal sent from the effect operation unit 300 to the effect operation unit 300 may be mounted on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters these articles and the articles break down.

In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached substantially in the center of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but the position where the vibration speaker 354 is attached may be a region on the rear side of the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a. With such a configuration, even if the mounting position of the vibration speaker 354 is raised, a large amount of liquid enters the effect operation unit 300, and a large amount of liquid stays inside the unit lower cover 311, the bottom wall 321a It is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the vibration speaker 354 and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down.

In the present embodiment, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, but the entire circumference of the vibration speaker 354 is provided on the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a with a vertical wall that stands upright with respect to the bottom wall 321a. May be covered. With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. It becomes possible to deter that.

Although an example is shown in which a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibrating speaker 354, the standing wall may cover a part of the periphery of the vibrating speaker 354. For example, a standing wall may cover at least the rear side of the vibration speaker 354. Further, the vertical wall may at least cover the vicinity of the position where the outer periphery of the vibration speaker 354 and the peripheral edge of the bottom wall 321a are closest to each other. Further, with respect to the portion where the wiring of the vibration speaker 354 is provided, a standing wall may not be provided at the corresponding portion. With such a configuration, a situation occurs in which the liquid flows down the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, the liquid enters the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the bottom wall 321a, and the vibration speaker 354 breaks down. It becomes possible to deter that. Further, the heat dissipation of the vibrating speaker 354 can be improved as compared with the case where a vertical wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the vibrating speaker 354.

On the upper surface of the bottom wall 321a, a plurality of ribs for increasing the strength of the bottom wall 321a are provided in the front-rear direction and the left-right direction, respectively. Further, the height of the ribs in the left-right direction (about 0.5 mm) is lower than the height of the ribs in the front-rear direction (about 2 mm). With such a configuration, it is possible to guide the liquid flowing into the operation unit base 320 to the through hole 321b without stagnation while maintaining the strength of the bottom wall 321a.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotary base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a plurality of units, are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward.

Here, the principle of the vibrating speaker 354 will be briefly described. The vibrating speaker 354 includes a voice coil, a magnet, a yoke, a diaphragm, and the like, like a general dynamic speaker. Further, a magnetic circuit portion including the magnet is elastically supported in the vibration speaker 354. When a sine wave of a predetermined frequency is input to the voice coil from the sound source IC, the voice coil is excited and the elastically supported magnetic circuit portion resonates to generate vibration, resulting in a vibration speaker. It is a mechanism to transmit vibration to the outside of 354.
On the other hand, as a conventional method of generating vibration, a method of generating vibration by rotating a motor (so-called "eccentric motor") in which an eccentric weight is attached to the output shaft of a cylindrical coreless motor is known. ..
Compared to this method, the method using the vibration speaker 354 has the advantages of being thin and taking up less space, being able to obtain stronger vibration than the method using an eccentric motor of the same size, and having high vibration directivity. There is. Further, the method using the eccentric motor has an advantage that the output shaft is heavily loaded and fragile, whereas the vibration speaker 354 has high durability.

The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the main body 321 via the legs 361b of the button unit base 361, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is transmitted from the bottom wall of the main body 321 to the button unit base. It is configured to be transmitted to the effect operation button unit 360 via the leg portion 361b of 361.
Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is produced from the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 via the flange portion 322. It is configured to reach the ring 330.
Further, the main body portion 321 is attached to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the vertical vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 is the main body portion. It is configured to be transmitted to the unit lower cover 311 via a plurality of leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321 from the bottom wall of the 321.
Further, the vibration from the unit lower cover 311 and the flange portion 322 is transmitted to the unit front cover 312.

In this way, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320, and the vibration is transmitted via the operation unit base 320, so that the entire effect operation unit 300 can be vibrated.

Further, the axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis that vertically passes through the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354, the axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are perpendicular to each other. By making the passing shaft the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, the axis that vertically passes through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the axis that vertically passes through the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are the same. Since the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration in the axial direction of the axis vertically passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354, the axis vertically passing through the center of the vibration speaker 354 and the center of the surface forming the surface of the pressing operation unit 303 are set. By making the axis passing vertically the same, the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 can be suitably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, the vibration direction of the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 is configured to be parallel to the operation direction of the pressing operation unit 303. In this case, it is possible to directly transmit the vibration output from the vibration speaker 354 to the player in response to the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 by the player.

Further, the vibration speaker 354 is not mounted in the member that moves by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303, but does not move directly by the pressing operation by the player, but does not move directly on the bottom wall of the main body unit 321. However, it is attached so as to be separated from the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, even when the player strongly operates the pressing operation unit 303 and a strong impact is transmitted to the effect operating unit 301, the vibration speaker 354 is moved by the pressing operation by the player like the pressing operation unit 303. Compared with the case where the vibration speaker 354 is mounted inside the member, the impact given to the movable body such as the voice coil and the diaphragm provided inside the vibration speaker 354 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent them from being damaged.

The means for generating vibration is not limited to the vibration speaker 354. For example, even when an eccentric motor is adopted as the means for generating vibration, the eccentric motor is also moved by a pressing operation by the player. By attaching it to a part where it does not occur, it is possible to prevent damage to the output shaft of the eccentric motor.

The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320 by transmitting the generated vibration to the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320. In addition to this, the effect operation By transmitting vibration to the plate unit 200 to which the unit 300 is attached, the lower plate 202 of the plate decoration unit 250 constituting the plate unit 200 and the upper plate 201 of the plate base unit 210 also forming the plate unit 200 can be obtained. It may be vibrated.

In this case, when the effect operation unit 300 is vibrated as an effect in the gaming machine, the vibration is generated as an effect even for the player who is touching the upper plate 201 without touching the effect operation unit 300. Since it is possible to make people aware of this, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, by vibrating the upper plate 201, the game ball B staying in the upper plate 201 can be smoothly supplied to the ball launching device 540.

Further, by vibrating the lower plate 202, the game ball B staying in the lower plate 202 can be smoothly discharged below the plate unit 200.

An example is shown in which the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 vibrates the entire effect operation unit 300 and further transmits the vibration to the dish unit 200 to which the effect operation unit 300 is attached, but the vibration is not transmitted to the handle unit 180. It is desirable to do so. This is because the vibration of the handle unit 180 may interfere with the operation of the handle 182 by the player.
In order to prevent the vibration from being transmitted to the handle unit 180, a member that absorbs the vibration may be provided inside the handle insertion port 252 g, or the magnitude of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 may be adjusted.

Further, since the effect operation unit 300 has a gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302, the effect operation unit 300 is upward with respect to the effect operation unit 300. Therefore, liquids such as coffee and juice and powdery objects such as cigarette ash and dust may enter as foreign substances. In this case, various sensors and motors provided in the effect operation unit 300 may malfunction, a gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, or a gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302. If foreign matter is caught in the vehicle, problems such as the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 not moving smoothly may occur. Therefore, these foreign substances are properly discharged. It is desirable to provide a mechanism for this.

Therefore, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration as an effect in the gaming machine and the entire effect operation unit 300 vibrates, these foreign substances fall downward in the effect operation unit 300 and fall on the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311. It is configured so that it can be gathered and finally discharged to the outside through the drain hole 311a. Further, since the vibration speaker 354 is installed below the effect operation unit 300, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the unit lower cover 311 which is also installed below the effect operation unit 300. ..

The generation of vibration by the vibration speaker 354 is used as an effect in the gaming machine, but at this time, foreign matter can be discharged at the same time, so that it is possible to deal with the invasion of foreign matter without interrupting the game. It becomes. Further, as an effect in the gaming machine, the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration with a predetermined probability, so that foreign matter is periodically discharged, so that the effect operation unit 300 is operated normally for a long period of time. It becomes possible.

As an effect by the gaming machine, an example in which vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 is shown, but the clerk or the player himself who has invaded a foreign substance can arbitrarily operate the effect operation unit 301 by the vibration speaker 354. Vibration may be generated.
In this case, it is preferable that the vibration speaker 354 can generate vibration by operating the effect operation unit 301 during non-game or when the power is turned on when the symbol does not change. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the effect operation unit 300 is large, and compared to the case of waiting for the vibration speaker 354 to accidentally generate vibration as an effect in the gaming machine, the foreign matter is quickly discharged from the drain hole 311a. It becomes possible.
Further, when the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is arbitrarily generated by operating the effect operation unit 301, the duration and the strength of the vibration speaker 354 are different from those of the case where the vibration of the vibration speaker 354 is used for the production in the gaming machine. Vibration may be generated.

On the other hand, as an effect in the gaming machine, even when the pressing operation unit 303 rises or falls or the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the foreign matter that has entered is discharged in the same manner as when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration. Can be prompted.
Further, as in the case of generating vibration by the vibration speaker 354, the store clerk or the player himself who has invaded the foreign matter can arbitrarily raise or lower the pressing operation unit 303 by operating the effect operation unit 301. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 may be able to be rotated.
In this case, by operating the effect operation unit 301 during non-game or when the power is turned on when the symbol does not change, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised or lowered, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Good. As a result, the amount of foreign matter that has entered the effect operation unit 300 is large, and compared to the case where the effect in the gaming machine is to wait for the pressing operation unit 303 to rise or fall, or for the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate by chance. , Foreign matter can be quickly discharged from the drain hole 311a.
Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is arbitrarily raised or lowered and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by operating the effect operation unit 301, the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered, and the effect operation ring 330 is operated. As compared with the case where the rotation is used for the production in the gaming machine, the ascending / descending / rotating may be generated at a different duration and a different speed.

In this embodiment, when the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration, it outputs a sound wave having a frequency of about 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, but this frequency is close to the lower limit of the human audible range and is a game machine. Considering the masking effect of the environmental sound of the pachinko hall where the device is installed and the audible sound output from other speakers (for example, the main body frame speaker 622) of the game machine itself, it is not practically recognizable by human hearing. ..

On the other hand, by giving a signal from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 to output a sound wave having a higher frequency than in the case of generating vibration, the vibration speaker 354 is controlled so as to emit an audible sound like a normal speaker. It is also possible to do.

In this way, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300 can output both vibration and audible sound according to the signal given from the sound source IC.

Further, by changing the amplitude of the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the strength of the vibration generated by the vibration speaker 354 can be changed.

Further, the signal supplied from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 may be continuously supplied or may be supplied intermittently. For example, continuous vibration may be generated by continuously supplying a signal for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), or signal supply may be started and stopped at predetermined periods (for example, 1 second). By doing so, intermittent vibration may be generated. This makes it possible to improve the interest.

Further, the operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. At this time, when vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, the operation unit base 320 is moved. Strong vibration may be transmitted to the operation ring drive motor 342 via the operation ring drive motor 342, and step-out may occur in the operation ring drive motor 342. Therefore, it is desirable that the operation ring drive motor 342 is driven and the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration exclusively. For example, after rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 and then stopping the rotation, vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354 or vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354, and then vibration is generated. After stopping, the rotation operation unit 302 may be rotated by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. As a result, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the operation ring drive motor 342, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of rotation control of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, by driving the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the pressing operation unit 303 is raised or lowered. However, even when a stepping motor is adopted as the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the operation ring drive motor 342 As in the case, it is desirable that the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the vibration speaker 354 generate vibration exclusively. As a result, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and it is possible to improve the accuracy of control for raising or lowering the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, it is preferable to operate the effect operation unit 301 when the symbol is not changed during non-game or when the power is turned on so that the vibration speaker 354 can generate the vibration transmitted to the game area 5a. As a result, the game ball B is clogged between the obstacle nail and the obstacle nail, or between the obstacle nail and various accessories without opening the door frame 3 (a state called "grape") or movable. It is possible to eliminate the state in which the ball is pinched by the winning device (so-called "ball biting" state).

[3-5e-8. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. It is attached to the upper base 363, the upper base 363, and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button main body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has an annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and a cylindrical board portion 378a extending upward from the inner circumference of the central button body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height that substantially coincides with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force lower than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is placed in the operation unit base 320 with its upper portion tilted forward, and is a part of the effect operation button unit 360, the button unit base 361 and the button unit base 361. The disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the above is also placed in the operation unit base 320 in a tilted state. With such a configuration, even if the liquid enters through the gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the invading liquid flows down the upper surface of the gear cover 372 toward the front side. It will flow down into the operation unit base 320.

Further, an operation button elevating drive motor 367 is attached to a region on the rear side of the lower surface of the button unit base 361. With such a configuration, even if the liquid enters through the gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, it is possible to prevent the liquid from flowing down to the operation button elevating drive motor 367. It becomes.

Further, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is provided with an operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a for power supply and control on its side surface, and the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is located on the center side of the button unit base 361. It is attached to the button unit base 361 so that it faces. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down from the peripheral edge of the gear cover 372 toward the operation unit base 320, the liquid comes into contact with the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a and causes an electrical problem such as a short circuit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as the occurrence.

In the present embodiment, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, but the lower surface of the button unit base 361 is provided with a vertical wall that stands upright with respect to the button unit base 361. The entire circumference of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 may be covered. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the liquid enters the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation such as a failure of the motor.

Although an example in which a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is shown, a part of the periphery of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 may be covered by the standing wall. For example, a standing wall may cover at least the rear side of the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Further, the vertical wall may cover at least the vicinity of the position where the outer circumference of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 and the outer circumference of the button unit base 361 are closest to each other. Further, for the portion where the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is provided, a standing wall may be provided so as to cover at least the portion corresponding to the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a. On the other hand, when the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is attached to the button unit base 361 so that the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a faces the center side of the button unit base 361, a standing wall of a portion corresponding to the operation button elevating drive motor terminal 367a is provided. It may not be. With such a configuration, the liquid flows down the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the liquid enters the operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached to the lower surface of the button unit base 361, and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation such as a failure of the motor. Further, the heat dissipation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 can be improved as compared with the case where a standing wall is provided so as to cover the entire circumference of the operation button elevating drive motor 367.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

The board box 391 is formed in a rectangular shape in appearance, and is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 so that the long side faces the left-right direction. Further, the substrate box 391 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized.

On the rear surface of the operation unit relay board 392, various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 are connected, and the dish base unit 210 is connected to the dish unit relay board 214. A plurality of operation unit relay board connector units 392a are provided. The board box 391 is provided with a board box opening 391b at a position corresponding to the operation section relay board connector section 392a in a shape such that a flat surface forming the rear side of the board box 391 is hollowed out. The shape of the board box opening 391b matches the shape of the operation unit relay board connector portion 392a, and specifically, it has a square or rectangular shape. Further, through the board box opening 391b, various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 and connectors provided at the end of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are provided. It is connected to the operation unit relay board connector unit 392a.

In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391b is provided in a shape such that the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 is hollowed out, but the substrate box opening 391b stands upright from the entire peripheral edge toward the rear. A waterproof wall 391c may be provided. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to deter.

A modified example is shown in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided from the entire peripheral edge of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 toward the rear, but the portion where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening. Instead of the entire peripheral edge of the portion 391b, only a part of the peripheral edge may be used. For example, at least a waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the peripheral edge corresponding to the upper half region of the substrate box opening 391b, or may correspond to the upper side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. At least the waterproof wall 391c may be provided on the peripheral edge, or at least the waterproof wall 391c may not be provided on the peripheral edge corresponding to the lower side of the substrate box opening 391b having a square or rectangular shape. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the liquid flows down into the substrate box 391. In addition, the connector at the substrate box opening 391b can be easily attached and detached.

A modified example is shown in which the waterproof wall 391c is provided from the peripheral edge of the substrate box opening 391b provided on the surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 toward the rear, but the portion where the waterproof wall 391c is provided is the substrate box opening. It may be a part other than the peripheral edge of 391b. For example, the waterproof wall 391c may be provided at a position away from the substrate box opening 391b. Further, the waterproof wall 391c of 1 may be provided so as to prevent the inflow of the liquid into the plurality of substrate box openings 391b. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to deter. In addition, the connector at the substrate box opening 391b can be easily attached and detached.

Further, the waterproof wall 391c may be formed in a straight line so that the waterproof wall 391c goes downward as it goes to the right or left. With such a configuration, even if the liquid flows down on the plane surface forming the rear side of the substrate box 391, the waterproof wall 391c may cause the liquid to flow down into the substrate box 391. It becomes possible to deter. Further, since the waterproof wall 391c is provided with an inclination, the liquid that has flowed down can be guided to the right or left, and the liquid that has flowed down from other articles below the waterproof wall 391c can be kept away. Is possible.

The operation unit relay board 392 is attached at a position between various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 in the front-rear direction. .. With such a configuration, the length of the wiring for connecting the various boards, motors, sensors, etc. provided in the effect operation unit 300 to the operation unit relay board 392, and the operation unit relay board 392 and the dish unit relay. It is possible to shorten the total length with the length of the wiring connecting the substrate 214.

The board box 391 is attached so as to keep a distance in the front-rear direction from the gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation unit 300. Has been done. Further, the board box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. With such a configuration, when the liquid enters the gap between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the gap between the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the rotation operating unit 302 in the effect operation unit 300. However, the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 serves as a wall, and it is possible to prevent a situation in which the liquid flows down into the substrate box 391.

Further, the substrate box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320 so that the upper portion thereof is inclined forward. With such a configuration, the area of the board box 391 in the plan view can be reduced as compared with the case where the board box 391 is mounted so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane, and the board box 391 flows down from above. It is possible to reduce the influence of the liquid.

In the present embodiment, the board box 391 is attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 so that the upper portion thereof is tilted forward, but the board box 391 is perpendicular to the horizontal plane. It may be attached. With such a configuration, the board box 391 in a plan view is compared with the case where the board box 391 is mounted so as to be parallel to the horizontal plane or the upper portion of the board box 391 is mounted so as to be tilted forward. The area of the can be reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

An example is shown in which the board box 391 is mounted so as to be perpendicular to the horizontal plane on the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320, but the board box 391 is mounted so that the long side of the board box 391 faces in the vertical direction. You may. With such a configuration, the area of the substrate box 391 in a plan view can be further reduced, and the influence of the liquid flowing down from above can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the substrate box opening 391b is provided in a shape such that the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 is hollowed out, and various types provided in the effect operation unit 300 through the substrate box opening 391b. The board, motor, sensor, etc. of the above and the connector provided at the end of the wiring from the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are connected to the operation part relay board connector part 392a, but cover the board box 391. The board box cover 393 may be attached from the rear of the board box 391 so as to cover at least a part of the board box 391. It is desirable that the substrate box cover 393 is formed in a planar shape so as to be parallel to the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391. Further, it is desirable that the substrate box cover 393 is provided with a certain distance between the plane forming the rear side of the substrate box 391 and the planar portion forming a part of the substrate box cover 393. Further, the substrate box cover 393 may have a shape that is convex rearward, and may have a shape that covers at least a part of the upper end, the left and right ends, and the lower end of the substrate box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a liquid enters the operation unit relay board connector unit 392a from occurring.

A modified example is shown in which the board box cover 393 that covers the board box 391 is attached from the rear of the board box 391, but the operation unit relay board connector portion is formed in the gap formed between the board box 391 and the board box cover 393. The surplus portion of the wiring connected to the 392a may be accommodated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various wirings in the effect operation unit 300 are contaminated by the flowing liquid.

A modified example is shown in which the board box cover 393 that covers the board box 391 is attached from the rear of the board box 391, but the protruding board box cover liquid that guides the liquid that has flowed down to the rear surface of the board box cover 393 in the left-right direction is shown. The guide portion 393a may be provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393. Specifically, on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be formed in a straight line, and the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be formed so as to go downward as it goes to the right or left. Further, on the back surface of the substrate box cover 393, two linear substrate box cover liquid guide portions 393a are provided in a mountain-shaped shape with a convex top so as to distribute the liquid flowing down to the right and left directions. It may be. Although the example in which the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a is tilted to the right or left is shown, the substrate box cover liquid guiding portion 393a may be provided parallel to the left-right direction. With such a configuration, the liquid that has flowed down to the substrate box cover 393 can be kept away from the portion of the gaming machine 1 that the liquid does not want to flow down.

An example has been shown in which the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a is provided so as to stand upright on the rear surface of the substrate box cover 393, but the substrate box cover 393 is replaced with or in addition to the substrate box cover liquid guide portion 393a as described above. It may be provided with a stepped portion itself, and the liquid may be guided by the stepped portion.

[3-5e-10. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and a wider variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, the light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b of the plate. The 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and is attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game is played in the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving the ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail cover 554. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent an abnormality from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated while being supplied, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B struck by the ball hammer 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 37A) of the launch passage portion 1012 composed of the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Driven in.

If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 37A, between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001. It falls from the foul ball drop port 1013 opened in the above to the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and passes from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is an opening for the ball. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b extend to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the lower side of the left side plate 551b from the front to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

[Countermeasures against electrostatic noise]
By the way, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a plurality of control boards including a main control board 1310 are mounted, and game control and effect control are performed by linking the control boards via commands output from the main control board 1310. Various controls such as payout control are performed. Since many electronic components such as CPUs that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise are mounted on these control boards, how to eliminate the influence of electromagnetic noise in order to guarantee stable gaming operation without malfunction. Is very important.

There are various possible sources of this electromagnetic noise, but a game ball is a noise source that is peculiar to a game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium, such as a ball game machine, and has the greatest influence. That is, the game balls are supplied to the ball tank 552 from above each game machine by the game island equipment, are used for the game in the game machine, and then are collected again on the game island. Static electricity is generated by friction between the game balls and friction between the game balls and the passage wall. Then, electromagnetic noise is generated by the discharge from the charged game ball, which adversely affects the electronic components such as the CPU.

As described above, the ball tank 552 is the place where the largest number of game balls, which are noise sources, are supplied and concentrated. Next is the tank rail 553 that guides the game ball from the ball tank 552 to the payout device 580. That is, it is considered that the amount of static electricity accumulated in the ball tank 552 is the largest. Therefore, it is considered to be a good idea to eliminate static electricity in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552. In addition, in order to realize more stable game operation, in addition to measures to suppress the generation of electromagnetic noise due to such momentary discharge of static electricity, even if electromagnetic noise is generated, it is necessary to use electronic components. Measures that can eliminate the adverse effects of

In the conventional gaming machine, for example, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120595 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69), the static electricity elimination of the gaming ball put into the ball tank 552 is described as " The ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782, although detailed illustration is omitted. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed. " Each ground is once integrated on the power supply board 630 (see FIG. 95) arranged on the CR unit 6 side at the bottom of the main body frame 4 of the gaming machine so as to easily supply the power supply AC24V which is the power supply for communication, and the power supply board 630 It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility via the ground.

FIG. 202A is a block diagram showing a ground system of a conventional gaming machine showing this aspect. As shown in FIG. 202A, conventionally, static electricity generated in various places such as a ball tank 552, various control boards represented by the main control board 1310, and an interface board 635 that interfaces with the CR unit 6 is generated. Once integrated on the power supply board 630, it was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the power supply board 630 and grounded.

Since the power supply board 630 is generally heavy, it is often arranged downward in a gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate on the ground power supply board 630, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank 552 at the upper part of the gaming machine, the payout device 580, or the like toward the lower power supply board 630. By routing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle, which may have an unexpected effect. Further, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board 630, if any problem occurs on the power supply board 630, the ground is affected, or conversely, a current flows through the ground wire, which affects the operation of the power supply board 630. There was a risk of giving. Further, when the grounding point of the island equipment is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to route the grounding wire collected by the power supply board 630 from the lower side to the upper side again.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the ball tank 552 to which the largest number of gaming balls are supplied and the largest amount of static electricity is generated is grounded without going through the power supply board 630. Further, in order to quickly eliminate static electricity, the ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin (for example, a resin obtained by increasing the content of the conductive filler mixed with the ABS resin), and conventionally, it was generated in the ball tank 552. The place where static electricity was connected to the ground through a tank rail or the like is connected directly to the ground from the ball tank 552. Then, the ground circuit board 559 that exerts a static electricity eliminating action is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate, separately from the power supply board 630, and the ball tank 552 and the ground circuit board 559 are connected by a ground wire. Further, the ground circuit board 559 is connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility.

FIG. 202 (b) is a block diagram showing a ground system of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 202 (b), static electricity generated in various places such as the interface board 635 and the power supply board 630 that interface with the CR unit 6 as well as the ball tank 552 is once collected on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground circuit is used. It was connected to the ground 6000 of the island facility through the board 559 and grounded. In this way, the grounding substrate 559 plays a role of once collecting static electricity generated in various places. In the present embodiment, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635, the power supply board 630, and the like are directly connected to the ground circuit board 559. Although the tank rail 553 that guides the game ball is made of a transparent non-conductive resin, it may have conductivity and be integrated with the ball tank 552 to have conductivity. In this case, it is also possible to provide conductivity by providing a metal plate inside, as has been conventionally performed. Further, it is possible to take the ground from the ball guidance unit 570, but if it is configured in this way, the ground path from the ball tank 552 and the plurality of paths of the ball guidance unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552 are configured. Is formed, and interference may occur between the two. Therefore, it is desirable to ground at one point from an appropriate place.

Then, the ground fitting can be connected to a plurality of places such as the side surface or the rear surface of the ball tank 552. The reason is that the supply (fall) position of the game ball to the ball tank 552 varies depending on the island equipment installed on the game hall side, so to connect the ground wire for electrical connection. It makes it possible to change the position closer to it. The mounting position of the ground fitting is appropriately selected in the ball tank 552 and mounted arbitrarily. Then, the ground circuit board 559 that exerts the static electricity eliminating action is arranged in the immediate vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity is most likely to accumulate.

FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for static elimination as viewed from diagonally rearward of the main body frame 4. Further, FIG. 204 is a back view showing the storage case portion 551j containing the ground circuit board 559 as seen through from above, and FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. Further, FIG. 206 is an enlarged view of a main part showing mainly the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 in FIG. 203.

As shown in FIG. 203, the payout base 551 is made transparent, and the payout base unit 550 is on the right side of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551 and is a tank rail. Above the 553, a case portion 558a in which the circuit portions of the external terminal plate 558 composed of a transparent resin case that can be visually recognized from the outside are integrated is arranged, and the circuit portion of the external terminal plate 558 (for example, a terminal) is arranged. Both the back surface of the plate and the connection portion between the external terminal plate 558 and the outside can be visually recognized from the outside. In this example, the external terminal plate 558 is a horizontally long rectangular one, and its long side is arranged along the left-right direction of the main body frame 4. Further, in this example, the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is arranged along the vertical direction of the main body frame 4, but the short side of the external terminal plate 558 is not limited to this, with respect to the vertical direction of the main body frame 4. It may be tilted and arranged. Further, an external terminal plate 558 (connection portion) is arranged on the rear surface of the case portion 558a.

Further, above the inside of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558, a thin box-shaped storage case portion 551j made of transparent resin whose inside is visible is arranged, and static elimination is performed inside the storage case portion 551j. The ground circuit board 559 for this purpose is housed with the back surface (solder surface) facing upward. Therefore, not only the connection portion of the external terminal board 558, but also the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal board 558, the back surface of the ground circuit board 559, and the connector portion described later are both easily visible from the outside. In this example, a transparent resin case makes it visible from the outside, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a hole (for example, a slit or a groove) that opens in the case that is not always transparent may be used. As a configuration in which not only the connection portion of the external terminal board 558 but also the back surface of the terminal plate of the external terminal board 558 and the back surface of the ground circuit board 559 and the connector portion described later can be easily seen from the outside. May be good.
Further, if the payout base 551 is also made of transparent resin, the back surface (solder surface) of the external terminal plate 558 can be visually recognized from the inside by removing the game board. The storage case portion 551j may be formed separately or integrally with the payout base 551.

Since the ground circuit board 559 is provided at such a position, when the gaming machine is viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, the payout base unit 550 and the external components included therein can be simply removed by simply removing the gaming board. The terminal plate 558 and the ground circuit board 559 can be visually recognized. At that time, since the external terminal board 558 and the ground circuit board 559 are located near the upper left when viewed from the front of the main body frame 4, it is necessary to open the door wide when trying to cheat. , It becomes difficult to attach an illegal electric element to the ground circuit board 559 or the like, and even if it is done, it becomes easy to detect that an illegal act is performed from the outside.

[Fixing mode of ball tank 552]
The fixing mode of the ball tank 552 in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 206. The ball tank 552 is attached to the left side of the upper back surface of the transparent payout base 551 by screwing. In this example, laterally protruding mounting portions 552a and 552b are formed on both left and right sides of the upper part of the front portion of the ball tank 552 that abuts on the mounting surface to the payout base 551. Then, from the rear of the main body frame 4, the mounting portions 552a and 552b are screwed to the payout base 551, respectively.

Further, the ball tank 552 has a mounting portion 552c formed by a boss portion projecting from substantially the center of the outer surface of the ball tank 552, and a boss portion formed so as to project in the rear portion of the right side portion in the rear view of the ball tank 552 in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a mounting portion 552d of the tank rail 553 and a mounting portion 552e of the ground fitting.

The tank rail 553 is attached by being screwed from below to the attachment portions 552c and 552d of the ball tank 552. Further, in this example, the ground fitting connected to one end of the ground wire 5591 (see FIG. 204) is screwed from below to the mounting portion 552e of the ball tank by a metal screw (not shown).

[Attachment of ground fitting in ball tank 552]
In this example, the mounting portion 552e of the ground fitting of the ball tank 552 is provided independently and exclusively for the other mounting portions, but it is not necessarily limited to being provided independently. It is also possible to share it with the mounting part of. Each example is given below.

For example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island equipment installed on the game hall side are concentrated on the left side inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 in FIG. 206. , Static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the left side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the ground fitting may be fastened to the mounting portion 552a with a metal screw together with the payout base 551.

Further, for example, the supply points of the game balls from the island equipment installed on the game hall side are concentrated in the central portion inside the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back surface side of the game machine 1 in FIG. 206. In this case, static electricity is most likely to accumulate in the central portion of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. In such a case, the ground fitting may be fastened together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw to the mounting portion 552c.

Further, for example, in the case where the supply points of the game balls from the island equipment installed on the game hall side are concentrated on the right side of the ball tank 552 in the perspective view shown from the back side of the game machine 1 in FIG. 206. , Static electricity is most likely to accumulate on the right side of the ball tank 552 near the entry point of the game ball. Further, apart from the entry point of the game ball, static electricity may easily accumulate on the right side portion of the ball tank 552 due to the accumulation of a large number of static electricity-bearing game balls. Further, since the tank rail 553 has a ball rectifying member 556 that aligns the game balls in a line so as not to overlap each other, the game balls are likely to stay. In such a case, the ground fitting may be fastened to the mounting portion 552d together with the tank rail 553 from below with a metal screw.

FIG. 204 is a perspective view of the storage case portion 551j of the payout base unit 550 provided with the ground circuit board 559 for static elimination as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 204, the ground circuit board 559 includes five connectors CN11 to CN15. More specifically, the other end of the static elimination ground wire 5591 connected to the ball tank 552, one end of which is made of a conductive resin, is connected to the connector CN13. It should be noted that even if a plurality of boss portions for ground connection are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the ball tank 552 so as to be able to respond to changes in the arrangement configuration due to an increase in each main effect device arranged in the lower part of the ball tank 552. Often, in order to deal with the factors that generate static electricity, it is desirable that the boss portions for ground connection are provided in a state of being separated from each other.

Further, the other end of the static elimination ground wire 5592 whose one end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4 is connected to the connector CN14. In addition, you may connect to the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 with a grounding metal fitting for grounding, and provide a separate connector CN16 (not shown) on the grounding circuit board to provide a grounding connection terminal. In this case, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. 205 described later, it may be connected in parallel to CN13 and CN14.

Further, one end of the ground wire 5593 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the connector CN15. Further, the other end of the ground wire 5595, one end of which is connected to the frame ground of the interface board 635, is connected to the connector CN11. The frame ground of the interface board 635 is electrically connected to the housing (frame) in which the CR unit 6 is housed via a predetermined wiring, and the noise current from the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed. Is connected to the ground circuit board 559 via the frame ground of the interface board 635 and the ground wire 5595. One end of the ground wire 5594 is connected to the connector CN12. Then, by connecting the other end of the ground wire 5594 to the ground prepared in the island equipment (game machine equipment) in which the game machine 1 is installed, the entire game machine is grounded.

FIG. 205 is a circuit diagram of the ground circuit board 559. One end of the ground resistor ER1 is connected to one end of the connection wire from the connector CN13 to which the ground wire 5591 connected to the ball tank 552 is connected. Further, one end of the ground resistance ER2 is also connected to one end of the connection wire from the connector CN14 to which the ground wire 5592 connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4 is connected. That is, by electrically connecting to the part where static electricity is accumulated via the earth resistor ER1 (resistance value 510Ω as an example in this example), removing the static electricity by gradually guiding it to the ground of the amusement machine equipment, and gradually discharging it. It suppresses the momentary discharge of static electricity.

Further, the other end of the ground resistor ER1 and the other end of the ground resistor ER2 are connected, and the rear stage of the connection point on the ground resistance ER1 side is bifurcated, and one of the branches is connected to the connector CN15 (power supply board). The other branch is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment). The latter stage of the connection point on the ground resistance ER2 side is connected to the connector CN11 (interface board).

Since the noise current flowing from the CR unit 6 to the interface board 635 via the housing in which the CR unit 6 is housed is small, the ground wire 5595 uses a thinner ground wire than the other ground wires 5591 to 5594. The connector CN11 for connecting the ground wire 5595 is also smaller than the other connectors (see FIG. 204).

As described above, the ground circuit board 559 provided with the ground resistors ER1 and ER2 is provided inside the storage case portion 551j, and the ground connected to the ball tank 552 at one end of the ground resistor ER1 provided on the ground circuit board 559. A wire is connected, and the instantaneous discharge of a high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise is suppressed via the ground resistor ER1. Further, a ground wire connected to a metal member of the main body frame of the main body frame 4 is connected to one end of the ground resistance ER2 so as to suppress an instantaneous discharge of a high voltage that causes electromagnetic noise through the ground resistance ER2. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 205, the static electricity in each place is connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) at one point so that the static electricity can be released by one system. For example, it is possible to take the ground wire from the ball tank 552 and at the same time take the ground wire from the ball guidance unit 570 connected to the ball tank 552, but in that case, it occurred in the ball tank 552. Since static electricity is divided into two systems, one that is directly connected to the connector CN12 (island equipment) and the other that is connected via the ball induction unit 570, static electricity removal by each route interferes with each other and grounding can be performed well. It may disappear.

Further, since the static electricity generated in various places is temporarily collected on the ground circuit board 559 arranged on the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 4, the static electricity is once applied to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 4 as in the conventional case. It is easier to route the ground wiring than the one to be aggregated.

Since the ground circuit board 559 and the external terminal board 558 were placed close to each other and placed on the upper right side of the main body frame 4 when viewed from the back surface, the ground wire 5594 from the ground circuit board 559 was connected to the ground 6000 of the island equipment. It becomes easy to perform the work of connecting and connecting the output wiring from the external terminal board 558 to the island equipment at the same time, and the workability is improved.

Then, the ground wire 5594 (see FIG. 204) is connected to the other ends of the ground resistance ER1 and the ground resistance ER2 toward the gaming machine equipment, and the ground wire 5594 is further pulled out from the rear surface of the storage case portion 551j to the outside. By connecting the drawn ground wire 5594 to the ground prepared in the amusement park equipment, the entire gaming machine is grounded. In this way, the length of the ground wire 5591 connecting the ball tank 552, which tends to accumulate static electricity, and the ground circuit board 559, which exerts a static electricity elimination action, is configured to be the shortest than the other ground wires.

Further, each ground wire is integrated on the ground circuit board 559, and the ground wire 5594 drawn from the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559 is directly connected to the ground 6000 of the island equipment to connect the power supply board 630. Can be grounded without passing through. Therefore, even if some problem occurs in the power supply board 630, it is possible to reduce the influence on the ground. On the contrary, since the ground is conventionally performed via the power supply board 630, there is a possibility that the operation of the power supply board 630 may be affected when a large amount of current flows through the ground wire. By grounding without passing through the power supply board 630, such a possibility can be avoided.

In the embodiment, ground resistance is provided between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the earth circuit board 559, and between the connector CN14 (main body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment). Although ER1 and ER2 are provided, it is not always necessary to provide a ground resistor. Since the ground resistance is provided to prevent a sudden current from flowing during grounding, it may be provided according to the expected generated voltage, and if necessary, the connector CN11 (interface board) and the connector CN12 (island). Equipment) and the connector CN15 (power supply board) may also be provided with a resistance having an appropriate resistance value. Further, a grounding resistor having an appropriate size may be provided in front of the connector CN12 (island facility) so that the static electricity generated in each part can be used as a common resistance for grounding. For example, the conductivity of the ball tank. It is also possible to perform grounding with an appropriate amount of current without providing a grounding resistor by adjusting.

The ground circuit board 559 is housed inside the storage case portion 551j with the back surface (solder side) of the board facing up, and is arranged so as to be visible from the outside of the payout unit base 550. Therefore, even if an illegal electric element is attached to the ground circuit board 559, it can be immediately and visually detected. Further, on the lower substrate surface, between the connector CN13 (ball tank) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) of the ground circuit board 559, the connector CN14 (main body frame metal member) and the connector CN12 (island equipment) are provided. Earth resistors ER1 and ER2 are provided between the connectors, and they are also attached so that they can be seen from the outside. Further, in order to prepare for an unexpected situation such as loosening of the connector, the storage case portion 551j may be removable from the payout unit base 550, and the ground circuit board 559 may be removable from the storage case portion 551j.

Further, hooking portions (for example, hook-shaped) for hooking the ground wire are provided on the outer surface of the case portion 558a of the external terminal plate 558 at a plurality of places, and after hooking the ground wire on these hooking portions, the ground circuit board 559 is used. The ground wire may be connected to the connector. In this way, it is possible to suppress the wobbling of the ground wire itself due to the weight of the ground wire and the influence on the connector due to the wobbling when the ground wire comes into contact with other members, and it is possible to stabilize the connection.

Since the ball tank 552 is made of resin, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 80, the ball tank 552 stores game balls or the balls collide with each other from the upper part, so that the bottom portion of the ball tank 552 is formed. If the ball tank 552 bends and comes into contact with the lower member, it may be grounded. Therefore, even if the bottom of the ball tank 552 bends, the ball tank 552 does not come into contact with the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. A gap is formed to the extent that it is avoided. Further, by providing the gap, the impact when the game ball is thrown into the ball tank 552 from the island equipment is not transmitted to the member below it.
Further, in the ball tank 552, when grounding is taken from the mounting portion 552a provided on the left side and connected to the ground circuit board 559, the ground wire connecting the mounting portion 552a and the ground circuit board 559 is connected to this gap. It is recommended to configure it so that it can be passed through using.

Further, as shown in the perspective view of FIG. 12, when the game board 5 is fitted and mounted on the main body frame 4, the peripheral control unit 1500 is located below the ball tank 552. Since the peripheral control unit 1500 has an electric drive source for driving the effect display device 1600 and other movable accessories for effect, it tends to generate heat. Therefore, a flame-retardant polycarbonate resin (transparent or black) is used for the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By making the peripheral control board box 1520 made of resin, there is an effect that the weight can be reduced as compared with the case where the peripheral control board box 1520 is made of metal.

The peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is made of polycarbonate, which is a conductive resin having a lower electrical resistance than the ABS resin constituting the ball tank 552 (by adjusting the content of the conductive filler to be high). It can be realized, for example, by increasing the amount of carbon contained). That is, the conductivity of the peripheral control board box 1520 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is higher than that of the ball tank 552. The peripheral control board box 1520 may be made of metal. This is because the peripheral control board 1510, which is easily affected by electromagnetic noise due to static electricity, is housed inside.

The peripheral control board box 1520 is also connected to the ground circuit board 559 via a ground metal fitting (not shown) to the main body frame metal member by a ground wire, and finally to the ground circuit board 559 by a ground wire 5592. ing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to suppress the electromagnetic wave noise generated by the discharge of static electricity, and to remove the static electricity as soon as possible so as to be less susceptible to the electromagnetic wave noise. Further, since the polycarbonate is resistant to high heat, it is possible to prevent the influence of heat transfer on the main control unit 1300 arranged below the polycarbonate due to its self-extinguishing property (resistant to high temperature).

When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a contact pressing portion that abuts and presses the ball supply lever that operates in the direction of opening the game ball on the island equipment side in the direction of supplying the ball tank 552. Is formed on the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552. In this example, a protrusion protruding outward is provided on the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion forming the peripheral wall of the ball tank 552 (see the side portion and the rear portion of the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 80). ). Therefore, the impact when the ball tank 552 hits the ball supply lever can be absorbed to some extent.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream. The ball stop member 557 is arranged inside a recess (not shown) formed in the payout base 551, and does not project rearward as shown in FIG. 80. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball stop member 557 from being unexpectedly contacted and caught.

As described above, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal plate 558 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front on the upper surface of a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 includes a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball removal passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. , The game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is open forward, and closes the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 92).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

In the guidance passage 570a, the depth on the front-back right side and the width in the left-right direction are formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a by an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank discharge passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number is set based on the detection of the ball out by the ball out of ball detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is communicated with the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from below. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and enhance the deterrent against fraudulent activities.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that give a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. It is provided with 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the large winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown). Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. It is attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the 1100, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001. , The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the start which is the lower right corner of the front view in the game area 5a. The attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100 and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a starting port unit 2100 and It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached above the side unit 2200 and slightly above the center of the front view in the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 mounted on the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a plurality of back effect units 3100.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the route unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is at the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is substantially the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction 1121. It has.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 102) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 has a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning opening via the panel relay board 3031. It is connected to the sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 99, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the game status and a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs and a normal hold display 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port. The first special hold number indicator 1405 consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to 2002, and the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004. The second special symbol display 1406 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result and the second special holding number indicator 1407 consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. And have.

Further, the function display unit 1400 is a round composed of five LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" or the like. It is equipped with a display 1408.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 101. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image. ing.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view, and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. The effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and insert the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 where the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 in which the game ball B can be accepted at either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The large winning opening 2005 is arranged at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 on the upper right side of the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the center in the left-right direction.

The table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the side unit 2200, which is mounted on the right side of the front view of the starting port unit 2100, are installed. An attacker unit 2400 having two general winning openings 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a. And a front effect unit 2600 attached to the center accessory 2500.

The attacker unit 2400 of the table unit 2000 has a large gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003, and a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B that has been received by the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a large winning opening sensor 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) that detects the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 102). Further, the attacker unit 2400 has a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start port. It is provided with an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the large winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into 2004.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is attached to the front of the. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and various effect units and the like provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. it can.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has a frame on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view so that the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 can be released. It includes a warp outlet 2502 that is open inside, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). When attached to 1110), the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is formed in a wavy shape so as to be slightly higher than both the left and right sides. The stage 2503 is inclined so that the portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides in the center of the left-right direction and the lowest portion (valley) on both the left and right sides are lowered toward the front. Therefore, the game ball B can be released into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side of the upper surface are the outer circumferences (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a in the front view. It is attached so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Then, the attacker unit 2400 is attached below the upper part of the right side surface of the center accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B for the large winning opening 2005 that is open (open) with a high probability.

Although not shown in detail, the front effect unit 2600 depends on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorative bodies that can move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The front effect unit 2600 can perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effect to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 102).

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably mounting the display device 1600, a panel relay board 3031 mounted on the left end of the rear view below the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and mounted in the back box 3010. It is equipped with a back effect unit 3100.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped opening protruding rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010c. A notch 3010d is provided at the center of the left side of the rear view of the portion 3010b in the vertical direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the effect display device 1600 into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached to the back box 3010 on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like at appropriate positions.

The panel relay board 3031 includes a main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first. (1) The purpose is to relay the connection with the start port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

Although not shown in detail, the back effect unit 3100 depends on the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. , It is equipped with a plurality of effect decorative bodies that can move and emit light, and can perform movable effects and light emission effects. The back effect unit 3100 can perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using a plurality of effect decorative bodies, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present various patterns of effect to the player. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail in FIG. 102, but as shown in FIG. 154, the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are directly attached to the main control board 1310. The magnetic sensor 3003, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the starting port solenoid 2404, and the attacker solenoid 2405 are connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 3031. May be good. A detailed description of the control configuration will be described later with reference to FIGS. 103 to 153.

The main control board 1310 is a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and an input / output device (I / O device). The main control I / O port, the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signals from various detection switches are input, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and the RAM built in the main control MPU. It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The mouth sensor 2402, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball received in the large winning opening 2005. The detection signals from the large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects B, the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a (described later as the magnetic detection sensor 4024), and the like are the main controls I, respectively. Input via the / O port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405. , Status display 1401, normal symbol display 1402, normal hold display 1403, first special symbol display 1404, first special hold number display 1405, second special of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port. A drive signal is output to the symbol display 1406, the second special hold number display 1407, the round display 1408, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big winning opening sensor 2403 B detection also occurs frequently. For this reason, the large winning opening sensor 2403 also uses a proximity switch with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for ejecting the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside (upper plate 201) of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball pulling operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cut detection sensor 574 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit and payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. Input to MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit 226 of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 102, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the above.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and produces various effects from the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects that match the above flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

Further, in the vibration speaker 354 as well as other speakers, sound information that changes to vibration is extracted from the sound ROM based on the control data from the peripheral control MPU using the sound source IC, and is used together with the push button effect. Will be done. For example, the player can use the effect operation unit 301 as a trigger of the sound of "press the button !!" displayed on the effect display device 1600 or "press the button !!" sounded from the speaker that generates the sound. At this time, the vibration speaker uses sound information that changes to vibration, and the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 is viewed as a diaphragm, and the vibration of the vibration speaker is transmitted to the effect operation unit 301. At this time, the player feels as if the production operation unit 301 trembled.

Here, the vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency should be input. In this case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In this embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. In the gaming machine of the present implementation, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) in 1 Hz units for each cycle of about 8 times per second. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second.

Regarding the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, a series of processes in the RAM clear process as shown in steps S16 to S36 of the flowchart of FIG. 125 may be used, or the RAM clear process may be used as an opportunity. I try to do it as.
In the gaming machine described in this embodiment, the information stored in the main control board 1310 and the information stored in the payout control board 633 when the power is cut off are stored and held in the same manner.
Specifically, a capacitor that stores electric charge during energization is connected to the power supply terminal for the RAM built in the CPU, and power is supplied by the electric charge stored in the capacitor when the power is cut off.

Here, at the time of shipment of the gaming machine, sufficient energization is not performed, electric charges are not stored in the capacitor, and the RAM may be in an indefinite state. Then, when power is supplied with no charge stored in the capacitor, the checksum value and backup flag value recorded when the power is cut off do not exist as normal values, and the RAM is abnormal. Is determined. In that case, the CPU clears the entire area of the RAM and sends a RAM clear notification command to the sub-control board as a command related to the state when the power is turned on. Upon receiving the RAM clear notification sound command, the sub-control board repeats the notification regarding RAM clear for a predetermined period, for example, 90 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the operation of the vibrating speaker is confirmed by using this RAM clear notification period.
When the push button is operated while the CPU of the sub-control board is in the RAM clear notification state, as described above, the CPU of the sub-control board has a sine wave signal of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz (38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz units, one cycle each). As a result, it is changed (sweep) about 8 times per second. This is intermittently input for 1 second, and after 1 second, the input is repeated repeatedly to control the input to the vibration speaker for a predetermined period.

In the first place, information is stored in the RAM as collateral in the event of a temporary power failure when the player is in an advantageous state, such as during a big hit or during a probability fluctuation. On the contrary, in order to maintain fairness among the players, in order to maintain fairness among the players, when the probability fluctuates just before the store closes or when the player has to stop playing the game in the probability fluctuating state due to the convenience of the player. The RAM clear function is provided as a function to return the state to the initial state. Then, by pressing the RAM clear button when the power is supplied, the series of processes in the RAM clear described above are executed even when it is determined that the button is pressed. Therefore, even if the operation of the vibrating speaker is checked during the RAM clear notification period, the state of the sub-control board suddenly shifts to the operation check state of the vibrating speaker unless the RAM is consciously cleared during normal business hours. There is no such thing.

The sound source IC (or built-in IC) of the gaming machine described in this embodiment has six audio output terminals to which speakers can be connected, and the audio set for each channel is mixed by the built-in mixer to be mixed with each speaker. Is output via the connected audio output terminal.
Here, the audio output terminal can be selectively set, and for the vibrating speaker, one of the plurality of provided audio output terminals is set as the audio output terminal dedicated to the vibrating speaker. ing.

Further, since the audio signal in the normal speaker and the signal for vibration in the vibration speaker both have the same form, a common sound source IC can be used for signal generation. However, since each function and purpose are different, it is preferable to separate the audio output terminal used for audio and the audio output terminal used as a vibration source in order to avoid confusion between the two. With this setting, for example, when it is desired to uniformly reduce the volume all at once, it is possible to collectively manage the volume adjustment using the main volume or the like, which will be described later. It is possible to control the sound and the vibration separately so that the production by the vibration speaker generated at the same timing can be controlled without being narrowed down at the same time.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5 are input with a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is based on the received game board side lighting / blinking command. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided on the door frame 3, each drive motor provided on the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[6-3b. Production display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a VDP that displays and controls the effect display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an execution signal is input from the VDP and the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and the control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. Extract from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various characters on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. Driven by sub-scanning performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as the main scan. Output to each pixel. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, it is based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, the output is sequentially output to one line of pixels from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 99. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the launch passage portion 1012 by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the launch rail 544 and the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is an obstacle nail. By abutting against the game ball B, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). , The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and moves forward from either the top in the center in the left-right direction or the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top. Be released. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central top of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the top is located directly above the first start port 2002. .. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

When the game ball B rolling on the stage 2503 is released into the game area 5a from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a is the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and the attacker unit 2400. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 etc.

By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200, and is moved to the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or started. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the mouth unit 2100, the general winning port 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , It is discharged to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. This portion is provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 in the attacker unit 2400, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the result of the ordinary lottery (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time. The shorter the normal fluctuation time, the more the game ball B in which the "normal hit" is drawn at the gate portion 2003 will be accepted by the second starting port 2004.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the result of the special lottery that causes an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the special fluctuation time has elapsed, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Game ball B is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game ball B to be accepted, by allowing the large winning opening 2005 to accept the game ball B, a large number of game balls B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained. it can.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern that closes from is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is reached. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern that makes the game balls B unacceptable in a closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round). Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "2R jackpot" is repeated for 2 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "15R jackpot" is for 15 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the pattern sequence in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, back effect unit 3100, and the like are appropriately used to produce light emission. It is possible to perform a movable effect, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

[8. Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The plate unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is in the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are in the storage plate of the present invention, and the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of the unit cover unit 310 are in the decorative body of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is in the first decorative part of the present invention. The dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the unit front cover 312 is used as the second decorative part of the present invention, and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 in the present embodiment are used as the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the central button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 in the embodiment correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention, respectively.

[9. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is located at a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 in which the main body frame 4 is openably closed. The plate unit 200 having the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 capable of storing the door frame 202 bulges forward, and the plate unit 200 has a front end having a length of about 1/2 of the total width of the door frame base 101. Is provided with an effect operating unit cover unit 310 projecting forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101, and a central pressing operation unit 303a arranged concentrically on the upper surface of the effect operating unit cover unit 310, and an outer peripheral pressing operation. A unit 303b and a rotation operation unit 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 to which the effect operation unit 301 is attached to the upper surface is below the door window 101a that allows the inside of the game area 5a to be visually recognized. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the plate unit 200 (directing operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more prominent than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the player can be appealed. The power can be increased, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. Further, since the front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly projected forward below the door frame 3, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 should be moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. At the same time, the length of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or puts his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire effect operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the effect operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-emittingly decorated by the plate center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player is given a light-emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier for the player to notice, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 Since the front end of the machine is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-emitting and decorated by the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate center lower decorative substrate 316 according to the game state. When the effect operation unit 301 is light-emitting and decorated by the ring decorative substrate 352, the center button decorative substrate 376, and the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, the light illuminates the player from below, and the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301. The light emitting decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the lower unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301, and by directing the player's line of sight downward, the inside of the game area 5a provided in front. Can be kept away from the player's view to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a. Therefore, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start port 2004 or the grand prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are light-emittingly decorated to direct the player to the lower side of the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his / her line of sight to the game area 5a, the effect image or movable By changing the body etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, as described above, the unit front cover 312 is light-emittingly decorated according to the game state to attract attention, and the player can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area 5a in the gap. , The light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate the arrival of a chance to the player (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, so that the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the unit front cover 312 is light emitting decoration, and the player can be enjoyed. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the unit front cover 312 is greatly projected forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she looks away from the pachinko machine 1, so that the entire gaming machine including the gaming area is viewed. Is easier to see. As a result, the player can be made to feel as if he / she is at one tempo, and the player can be relaxed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, the presence of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized and the player's interest is strongly attracted. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine that enhances the appeal to the player and plays the game. Further, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 projecting forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward, so that the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. It is possible to facilitate the operation of the handle 182 for the purpose, the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201, and the like, making it difficult for the player to be stressed and suppressing the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 are arranged so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward. Since it extends in a semicircular ring shape, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, which makes it possible to give the player a smooth and soft impression. It is possible to make the player play the game in a calm mood, to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and it is difficult for the player to get injured even if he / she makes contact at first glance. It is possible to recognize that the game is safe, and by reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Further, by simultaneously emitting and decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward below the door window 101a. Since the entire light-emitting decoration can be made to stand out, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and there is nothing good for the player due to the light-emitting decoration of the whole. At the same time, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the production operation unit 301 to encourage the operation, and by having the player operate the production operation unit 301, the player participation type production can be enjoyed and enjoyed. Can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, since the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are in the shape of a semi-doughnut, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 and the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are used to upper the dish center depending on the playing state. When the entire decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate are luminescently decorated, the luminescent decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When the light emission decoration is performed, for example, if the light emission decoration is made so that the light flows from one side, the player can be shown a light emission effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. It is possible to surprise and make people think that there is something good, and at the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is mounted on the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body. The player can be urged to rotate the light of 312b in the same direction as the light is rotating. Alternatively, by alternately illuminating the upper plate decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b arranged vertically, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect in which the light moves up and down. At the same time, the light moving up and down can urge the player to press the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a. Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the upper center decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, the player is urged to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the player can accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, it extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. On the right side unit 410 of the flat door frame, three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction. Since the window 410a is formed and the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off in a normal state, the three side windows in the side window 410a are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island facility) of the pachinko machine 1 through the space between the interior decoration portions 410b. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest. After that, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily visually recognized through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. , The game can be played in the game area 5a, the player can enjoy the game, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

At this time, in the door frame 3 in which the left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 is rotatably attached by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, of the two outer sides in the left-right direction of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outside far from the axis of the hinge, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by the part of the door, it is possible to make it difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as if it were seen by another player. By making it hard to feel, it is possible to let other players play the game without hesitation. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and the game changes to a predetermined game state, the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 causes the three side window interior decoration portions 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window to emit light. By dazzling the inside of 410a, the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light can be radiated in a band-like and radial manner, and the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled so that the opposite side cannot be visually recognized from between. In addition, the light emission of the side window interior decoration portion 410b makes it possible to direct the player's line of sight to the side window interior decoration portion 410b, which diminishes the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a and the side window. The visibility through the 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as the neighbors to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of a chance for the player to have an advantage, the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light, and the side is caused by the glare. Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for another player such as the neighbor to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the other player pays attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, it makes me feel uncomfortable because other players are worried about it and cannot concentrate on the game, or I feel lost because of the induction of mistakes. Can be prevented, the game can be enjoyed, and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the side window 410a, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, the angle at which the side window 410a is viewed from the side changes. However, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b do not appear to overlap each other, when the side window interior decoration portion 410b is not emitting light, the opposite side is passed between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the side window 410a. A player who can visually recognize (inside the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily found without doing so.

Further, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window interior decoration portions 410b having a certain height emit light, the portions having the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult for other players to see through the side window 410a. Therefore, by making a specific side window interior decoration portion 410b out of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b emit light according to the game state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction within the game area 5a, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance or the like. Therefore, when a game state such as the arrival of a chance, it is possible to prevent another player from looking into the game area 5a through the side window 410a, so that the player can concentrate on the game and play the game. It can be more entertaining and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward long is provided with side windows 410a penetrating to the left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off to turn off the side windows 410a. In the state where the visibility through the pachinko machine is secured, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that the island equipment does not have to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to easily detect that a fraudulent act is being performed in the game area 5a from the end of the window, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side away from the left side side which is hinge-rotatably attached to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened for maintenance or work such as replacement of the game board 5, the door frame 3 can be made less likely to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 widely, and deterioration of workability can be prevented. can do.

In addition, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are made to emit light according to the game state, there is a possibility that an advantageous game state (for example, a "big hit" game) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the decorative portion 410b in the side window may be turned on or off. More specifically, for example, during execution of a reach effect, a reach development effect, etc., when the expected value is low, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is made to emit light to make it difficult for other players to see, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state. When it is not done (when it is "lost"), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the decorative portion 410b in the side window is not emitted or turned off, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easily seen by other players (a "big hit"). ) By doing so, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player without creating an awkward atmosphere, and at the same time, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, which enhances the interest of the player in the game. You can enjoy the game more.

Further, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" gaming) that is advantageous to the player may occur (so-called "big hit" game). Depending on the expected value), the three side window interior decoration portions 410b may be made to emit light in order (for example, from bottom to top, top to bottom, center to top and bottom sides, etc.), or among the three side window interior decoration portions 410b. The decoration portion 410b in the specific side window of the above may be made to emit light. More specifically, for example, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light in order from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to look into the game, and to suggest the expected value, so that the player's sense of expectation for the game can be increased and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition to light emission (lighting) and extinguishing, the three side window decorations 410b as described above have different blinking patterns, different emission colors, and changes in emission color (for example, from cold blue to hot). It may be a change to red in feeling, a change in blue-yellow-red that imitates a traffic signal, etc.), or a change in brightness (luminance), etc. The decorativeness of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player can be obtained.

Therefore, on the contrary, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the gaming state is advantageous to the player depending on the presence / absence of light emission of the three side window interior decoration portions 410b and the light emission mode such as the light emission pattern. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of possibility (expected value) of occurrence of the above, the player is excited by how the three side window decoration portions 410b emit light during the execution of the effect. -It can be throbbing, raising the player's expectation and suppressing the decline in interest.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the three side window interior decoration units 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or turn off. .. As a result, for example, when there is a low possibility (so-called expected value) of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "big hit" game) in which the player has an advantage during a reach effect or a reach development effect, the effect operation is performed. By operating the unit 301 to make the decoration unit 410b in the side window emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from looking into it, so that when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (at the time of "loss"). In addition, it is possible to prevent an awkward atmosphere from being seen by other players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, when there is a high possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state will occur (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is operated so that the side window interior decoration unit 410b does not emit light. By doing so (or turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if another player looks into it, an advantageous gaming state will occur, and the atmosphere will not be awkward and the interest will be reduced. In addition to being able to suppress it, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which other players are cheering, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301, it is possible to set the timing and mode of light emission of the three side window interior decoration units 410b. As a result, in the preset default state, the timing peculiar to the player who does not want to be peeped by other players is not set, so that some players feel uncomfortable to be peeped and enjoy the game. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the effect operation unit 301, the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved, and the player's interest in the game can be achieved. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball pulling lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable and the ball is pulled out. Assuming that the passage 580b is closed (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be distributed to the ball removal passage 580b by the ball removal movable piece 592. , It will continue to circulate to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and can be sent to the payout blade 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball pulling lever 593 is raised (locked) to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable (second state), the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a from the upstream moves into the payout passage. Instead of circulating to the downstream side of 580a, it will be distributed to the ball pulling passage 580b beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592, and may be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 on the island equipment side via the ball pulling passage 580b. it can. Since the payout blade 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, in the normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 makes the ball pulling movable piece 592 non-rotatable (first state). On the upstream side of the payout blade 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a string of beads.

When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B on the upstream side of the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball pulling movable piece 592. The game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blades 589, and the speed at which the game balls B on the upstream side of the payout blades 589 flow is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball-extracting movable piece 592 due to contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 that comes into contact with the game ball B is near the center of the ball-extracting passage 580b, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball pulling passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not damaged. From this, since it is possible to reduce the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the damage of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball pulling lever 593 can be raised to rotate the ball pulling movable piece 592. In the state (second state), the game ball B, which was in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, flows down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592. Become. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon. In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592. Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The possibly attached main body frame 4 is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame on the left side side with respect to the main body frame 4 and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame (axis core). ) Is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 extend in parallel facing each other and extend in parallel when the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable / closable (rotatable hinge) is closed. The payout control board 633, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the main body frame 4 side are connected to the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the effect operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. The connection cable 503 extends toward the shaft core from a portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame 4 and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connecting cable guide member 502 extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame 3 and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is further extended to the vicinity of the shaft core, then folded back and extended in a direction away from the shaft core. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side are held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 in the door frame 3. It is connected to the.

Then, when the door frame 3 whose front side of the main body frame 4 is closed (closed) is hinged around the axis on the left side so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the portion of the connection cable 503 extending from the door frame 3 moves forward so as to move away from the main body frame 4, so that the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the mounting shaft 502c away from the shaft core so that the connection cable guide member 502 tilts with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 as the connection cable 503 is deformed. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 in this way, the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 near the axis protrudes into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, so that the connection cable guide The connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the axis, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are less likely to get in the way.

In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the tip portion from the rotatably mounted mounting shaft 502c toward the shaft core side, the base end portion of the guide member can be extended like a conventional pachinko machine. Compared to the case where the connection cable 503 is extended away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position is close to the lower hinge pin 126, and the folded portion of the connection cable 503 can be positioned so as not to be in the way.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 which is open to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves so as to approach the front surface of the main body frame 4, so that the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 Is moved in the opposite direction to the above, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is held without being sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Therefore, during maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be smoothly performed, and the maintenance is interrupted. It is possible to reduce the increase in the interruption time of the game being played, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and then is folded back and extends in a direction away from the shaft core is placed at a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Since it is held on the door frame 3 side by the cable holder 103a, the rotation angle of the connecting cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a around the axis. Since the tangent line that is in contact and passes through the center of the mounting shaft 502c of the connecting cable guide member 502 is at an angle or less that intersects the rear surface of the door frame 3, the axial axis in the longitudinal direction of the connecting cable guide member 502 is the door frame 3. It is possible to prevent the angle from being close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface. Further, on the door frame 3 side, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502, the door frame is held with respect to the main body frame 4. When closing 3, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the axis side.

From these facts, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 does not close or the connection cable guide is provided. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an abnormality such that the tip of the member 502 abuts on the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is broken. Therefore, when an abnormality occurs during the game in which the door frame 3 must be opened and closed for maintenance, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. It can be smoothly performed, the increase in the interruption time of the game can be reduced, and the decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, a position closer to the shaft core than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 when closed (the shaft core rather than the cable holder 103a). A pressing portion (a position closer to) that can press the connection cable 503 toward the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting the cable holder (axis core rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103). A part that protrudes rearward on the side) is provided. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line passing through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502 and tangent to a circle passing through the pressing portion centering on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and the front surface of the main body frame 4. The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. As a result, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member The 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

Further, since the frame pieces 502b are provided on each of the two long sides of the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat plate guide body 502a increases and it becomes difficult to bend, so that the connection cable 503 is firmly connected. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-mentioned effects can be surely realized.

Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is increased, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 composed of many electric wires. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, and the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good condition, and more electric wires can be guided. Since this is possible, the electrical connections between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be integrated in one place, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

Further, with the connection cable 503 attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the work of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 can be easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 through the through hole 502d of the connecting cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from coming off from the guide member 502, and the connecting cable guide member 502 The connection cable 503 can be reliably held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by disconnecting the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. It is possible to avoid the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is under the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since it communicates with the space (internal space 40a of the curtain plate) between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the assembly 40, the space inside the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side provide the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 624 of the 622 can be sufficiently secured, the deep bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the deep bass sound can entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game. Can be done. Therefore, by providing the cable mounting recess 501h for mounting the connection cable guide member 502 on the main body frame 4, even if the volume inside the speaker unit 620a is reduced, the deep bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and a connection cable guide member 502 that exerts the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 holding a part of the connection cable 503 is mounted inside the cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is housed in the cable mounting recess 501h, and the protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 can be prevented. It can be avoided and the door frame 3 can be surely closed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body in the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion port 501b of the frame base 501 can be visually recognized from the front (player side), and below the door window 101a, the lower side of the outer frame 2 is formed. The front end of the port member 47 is open near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port is opened in the lower part of the front surface of the door frame 3. The speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened near the left end portion on the opposite side in the left-right direction from the member 47. Then, the speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4, and the speaker unit 620a covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 via the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a is driven, the sound such as the sound, music, and sound effect output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 is generated by the speaker mounting portion of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker ports 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate internal space 40a composed of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. Is transmitted and radiated from the port member 47 to the player side in front. At this time, since the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is composed of the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the enclosure 624 The volume can be increased as much as possible, and the sound extending in the low frequency range can be output forward from the main body frame speaker 622. Further, since the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) in the enclosure 624 are opened. ), The width of the connection portion in the depth direction (front-back direction) can be made larger than before, so that the width of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c in the front-rear direction is increased, and the inside of the speaker unit 620a. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of the sound from the space to the inner space 40a side of the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a tubular shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the bass range can be amplified and the phase can be inverted, and the port member can be inverted. It is possible to output a sound in which the bass is amplified from 47. Then, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 interfere with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1 and are combined, so that the volume becomes louder. , It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and it is possible to entertain the player with sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects, and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, since the port member 47 inverts the phase of the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 and radiates it forward (constituting a so-called bass reflex type speaker), the main body. When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phases of the sound are the same as each other, so that the amplitude of the sound wave becomes large and the volume of the sound becomes loud. Compared to the case of using the passive radiator of, the sound output can be enhanced with a simple configuration.

Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are arranged below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, the vertical dimensions thereof can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, in general, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the vertical direction. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is played is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. From this, since it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, it is lower than the outer frame lower assembly 40 forming the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501b in the main body frame 4. Since it is possible to make the vertical dimension of the side relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. , It is possible to output a sound with richer bass, and it is possible to entertain the sound to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, since the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c are inclined in the front-rear direction, the connection portion 621c abuts on the connection cylinder portion 43a and abuts each other only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, the same effect as described above can be obtained, and since no sliding resistance is generated between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 becomes heavy. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability during maintenance and the like.

Further, since the sealing member 48 seals between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, it is possible to prevent sound leakage in the enclosure 624 between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board can be relatively reduced. The insertion port 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 having a wider game area 5a, and the wider game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the wide game area 5a can be provided through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out by seeing, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to the player.

Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end portion in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end portion on the opposite side. Therefore, since the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are separated from each other in the outer frame. 2 (Pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, and the sound can be amplified in the vicinity of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and as described above, the player can hear the sound. On the other hand, you can hear rich bass sound.

Further, as described above, since the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is made to interfere with each other in the vicinity of the player and amplified, other pachinko machines 1 are separated from the pachinko machine 1. The player will receive the unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can hear a sound with a loud volume and rich bass, which raises expectations for the game. Can be made to. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player playing with another pachinko machine to hear the sound from the pachinko machine 1, so that it is difficult for the pachinko machine 1 to recognize that an opportunity has arrived. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peep causes discomfort to the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the position of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is set to the center in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c of the above is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a with respect to the left-right direction can be set from the vicinity of the left end portion where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center, and the main body frame. In No. 4, a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, other members are arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction in between, or the other members are enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine from other pachinko machines by other members, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the side opposite to the speaker unit 620a with the center of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the left-right direction in between, the game ball B is discharged to the outside in that space. Base unit 620b provided with a ball pulling-out guide unit 627, a discharge ball receiving unit 628, etc., and a ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. , A power supply board 630 that controls the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game medium ball, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 can be surely provided with them. ..

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation unit protruding upward from the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward and downward in the game area 5a of the game board 5 on which the game is played. An annular rotation operation that surrounds the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. Since the portions 302 are arranged so as to be inclined so that the front end side of the upper surface is lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The head (face) faces a certain direction, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily seen, and three large operation units (pressing) arranged concentrically. The operation unit 303 and the rotation operation unit 302) can be shown to the player, can give a strong impact to the player, and have a form clearly different from the operation unit provided in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to recognize at a glance that the operation unit is provided, and it is possible to differentiate the pachinko machine 1 from other pachinko machines and strongly attract the interest of the player. Further, since the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are conspicuous, a game in which the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operating unit 302 are operated by the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the player-participation-type production, and the game is advanced so that the player-participation-type production is executed (here, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). ), And when the player participation type production is executed, it is possible to easily participate in the production, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly projected from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the elevating mechanism including the operation button elevating drive motor 367 or the like according to the game state (lowering position). ) And the protruding position (rising position) protruding upward from the retracted position, and at the retracted position, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the locking portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371. Since the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in the retracted position, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation unit 303a can be reliably pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b cannot be pressed in the retracted position, there is an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a with the momentum of rotating the rotation operation unit 302 or rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the momentum of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player-participatory production can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Then, by moving to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of being greatly projected upward on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, so that the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303a The 303b can be made to stand out, a strong impact can be given to the player, and a premium feeling can be given to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and there is something good. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making people think that it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type production in which the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In this protruding position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are arranged concentrically, for example. , When the central pressing operation unit 303a must be pressed, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed. When the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b must be pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a may be pressed, or both the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated, or when the rotation operation unit 302 must be rotated, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a It can be induced to press. As a result, the player can perform the pressing operation and the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed and the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated when performing the pressing operation and the rotation operation. , It is possible to give a feeling of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type production in which the pressing operation and the rotation operation are performed. It is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of a person's game.

Further, it is equipped with a notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600, and in a player participation type effect, the player performs a central pressing operation in a protruding position where the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b can be pressed. If the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is mistakenly pressed when the unit 303a should be pressed, the center pressing operation unit 303a is notified by the notification means that the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, so that the pressing operation is redone and the pressing operation is performed. The central pressing operation unit 303a to be pressed can be reliably pressed, the player can enjoy the player participation type production, and the mistake in the pressing operation is corrected, so that the player loses by making a mistake. It is possible to avoid feeling uncomfortable, to entertain the player-participatory production, and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, when the player thinks that the central pressing operation unit 303a is being pressed correctly, the reaction (change) of the player participation type production despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the central pressing operation unit 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion and the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, the player's belief can be corrected, and the central pressing operation unit 303a is correctly pressed to participate in the player. You can entertain the pattern production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate for storing the game ball B for bulging forward and playing a game in front of and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is played. In the dish unit 200 provided with 202, an annular rotation operation unit 302 whose outer peripheral side surface, upper surface, and inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside and can rotate around an axis extending vertically, and inside the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is arranged therein, and a rotation operation unit 302 is arranged according to a game state that changes as a game is performed in the game area 5a. The peripheral control board 1510 executes a player-participation-type effect such as rotating the machine or pressing the pressing operation unit 303. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303, so that the rotation operation or the pressing operation can be performed. Since the effect is changed, the player can participate in the effect, entertain the player, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside to operate the rotation operation unit 302, and the most from the rotation center of the rotation operation unit 302. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when the rotation operation is performed by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface by rubbing it in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when the player participation type effect that requires the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate at high speed is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above, so that the player can rotate the rotation operation unit 302 at a high speed. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired at an early stage, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. It is possible to continuously entertain the player-participatory production in which the operation unit 302 is rotated and operated, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Further, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type production, the player is required to perform various rotation operations. It is possible to request different rotation operations for each, and it is possible to present a wider variety of player participation type productions to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be done.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface of the operation cover (composed of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337) that the player touches and rotates is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) in an arc shape from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if the rotation operation is performed by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even from a direction other than the side (direction perpendicular to the rotation axis) of the rotation operation unit 302. Since it is easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the player can operate the rotation operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Operability can be improved. Therefore, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type production. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a large diameter, it is easier to perform a rotation operation at a minute rotation angle and a rotation operation as compared with a rotation operation unit having a small diameter such as a conventional pachinko machine. Since the movement of the player at the time of the above can be increased, the player can be made to feel that the rotation operation unit 302 is being rotated, and the rotation operation unit can be used in the player participation type production. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation of the 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the upper surface other than the outer peripheral side surface is exposed. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side surface, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the game of rotating the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to make the participatory production more enjoyable and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is provided in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 302 is pressed. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation are fully enjoyed to suppress the deterioration of interest. Can be made to.

Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be grasped by the player. The appearance of the part 302 can be completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, and the like. As a result, for example, when the rotation operation unit is shaped like the steering wheel of an automobile, the player thinks that the rotation operation unit is gripped and operated at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit. When a player-participation-type production that requires a variety of rotation operations is executed, it is not possible to perform a rotation operation different from that of the steering wheel-handling, and the player-participation-type production is performed. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in the game will be reduced. However, in the present embodiment, since the appearance of the rotation operation unit 302 is completely different from that of the steering wheel of an automobile, the control stick of an airplane, etc., the player is prejudiced about how to operate the rotation operation unit 302. It becomes possible to dispel the above, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as desired by the player, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Therefore, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed and the deterioration of interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate for storing the game ball B for bulging forward and performing the game in front of and below the game area 5a in which the game is played on the game board 5. From the annular rotation operation unit 302 whose rotation axis extends vertically on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 provided with 202, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345 to detect the rotation. Therefore, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting rotation on the lower side over the entire circumference. Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). The part that meshes with) is only a part of the entire circumference of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. The operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged. Then, according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative substrate By appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs of 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) luminescent and decorated. The rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. A plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted (turned on / off) in the same direction and at the same speed. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates while the specific parts of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are light-emittingly decorated. It is possible to make the illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to enjoy the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to urge the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, to entertain the player-participatory production, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302 are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and are arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. A plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so as to have the same rotation speed as the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, even though the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated together with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 is emitting light. , It can give a strong impact to the player, it can give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by reminiscent of it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, a plurality of LEDs arranged in an annular shape on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be sequentially emitted to emit light, and the rotation operation unit 302 can show the player the light emitting decoration in which the light rotates. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the annular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and it is easy for the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. At the same time, it is possible to raise the expectation for the execution of the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotatably attached around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation operation is performed when viewed from a direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is arranged at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the plate unit 200 has a configuration related to the rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation unit 300 or rotation drive unit 340). Since the above can be compactly put together, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, the operation ring drive motor 342 for rotationally driving the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the game state is provided, and as described above, the rotation that can be light-emitting and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the rotation operation of the player, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 is rotated around and emits light according to the game state. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be made to stand out below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be lightened. .. Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 with the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be made heavier. Further, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction in which the operation ring drive motor 342 stops the rotation at each predetermined rotation angle. A click feeling can be given. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by reciprocating the rotation operation unit 302 within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. In this way, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operation feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to support a wider variety of player-participation-type productions. It is possible to make it difficult for a person to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in playing a game.

Further, since the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is provided, when giving the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. Since the operation feeling can be supported by the light by sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, it becomes easier to secure a space below the rotation operation unit 302, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be decorated with light emission more uniformly and brightly, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the central button decorative substrate 376 are used to illuminate and decorate the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in good condition. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from them, only the rotation operation unit 302 is light-emitting and decorated, only the pressing operation unit 303 is light-emitting and decorated, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is light-emitting and decorated, and the outer peripheral pressing operation is performed. Only the unit 303b can be light-emitting and decorated, so that the player can easily recognize the operation unit to be operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed.

Further, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light turns by sequentially emitting light, so that the rotation operation unit 302 Effect operation It is possible to perform an effect in which the effect of the ring decorative substrate 352 and the effect of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when urging the player to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the LED of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 are sequentially emitted. , The light emitting decoration that the light rotates in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer circumference pressing operation unit 303b) of the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 also rotates the light according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302, or the player can use it. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the opposite direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 performs light emitting decoration such as rotating the light in the opposite direction. In this way, since it is possible to show the player the effect of various light emission, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the central button decorative substrate 376 that illuminate the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a, which are arranged concentrically, respectively. Therefore, for example, by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, and the center button decorative substrate 376 to emit light in this order, or in the reverse order, the rotation operation unit 302 is provided. It is possible to show an effect of light that concentrates on the central pressing operation unit 303a and an effect of light that diffuses from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, a wider variety of light emitting decorations can be shown to the player, the player can be entertained, and the player's interest can be directed to the central pressing operation unit 303a or the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to promote the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 provided with the game area 5a in which the game is played is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is opened and closed. A door window 101a in which the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front is formed on the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 which is possibly closed, and a glass unit 160 provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is attached to the door window. The upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are attached to the door frame 3 (door frame base 101) so as to close the 101a, and store the game balls B for playing the game below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The dish unit 200 provided with the above is attached.

Then, on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semi-circular donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two large-diameter upper plate center decorations 312a and plate center lower decorations 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and are continuous with both ends of the plate center upper decorations 312a and the plate center lower decorations 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450 having the same shape. The 453 is attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer circumference of the game area 5a.

Therefore, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer peripheral pressing are performed. Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to stand out, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the production operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape as if a similar cylindrical shape (tube) is circular, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the outer circumference of the game area 5a is surrounded by a cylindrical tube, and it is possible to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved, and the appealing power can be enhanced by directing the player's attention to the inside (the game area 5a, the rotation operation unit 302, and the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. , The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine for playing by increasing the expectation for the game with the pachinko machine 1.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape such that the cylindrical shape is an annular shape, the upper surface, the outer side surface, the inner side surface, etc. of the rotation operation unit 302 can be compared with the case where the rotation operation unit 302 has a flat disk shape. Since it is easy for the fingers to be applied, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as desired by the player. Further, since the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, the player can put his / her arm or finger on the upper center decorative body 312a and the lower center decorative body 312b of the plate, and the player operates the rotation operation unit 302 in a comfortable posture. In addition, the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 makes it possible to prevent the player from getting too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, it is possible to easily secure a space around the rotation operation unit 302 for the arm or finger to move for the player to operate, and the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved. In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type production is executed, and the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Participatory production can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between the retracted position (lowering position) and the protruding position (rising position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the pressing operation unit 303 is in a state of protruding greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player, raise the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. Can be made to.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's attention is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 becomes more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's attention can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 is moved between the descending position and the ascending position according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, thereby prompting the player to operate the effect operating unit 301. It is possible to allow the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation is performed. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a protrude upward from the rotation operation unit 302 when the pressing operation unit 303 becomes operable and the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowering position to the ascending position. The rotation operation unit 302, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and the central pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, depending on the content of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be appropriately used, and it is possible to correspond to a wider variety of productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the effect operation ring decorative board 352, the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the board 418, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate are provided. And the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are luminescently decorated to improve the appearance of the entire pachinko machine 1. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power by strongly attracting the interest of the player. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b, the door frame left side decoration body 404, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are appropriately emitted with light. By decorating, the player's line of sight can be guided from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or can be guided from the effect operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. Depending on the state, the player can be made to operate the effect operation unit 301 or play the game in the game area 5a, so that the player is less likely to get bored and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the lower end while the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the ascending position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed. Although not detected is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be detected. As a result, even with the same pressing operation, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different production modes, and when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is promoted. It is possible to perform a wider variety of player-participation-type productions, entertain the players, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the above embodiment, in a state where the pressing operation unit 303 (center pressing operation unit 303a and outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the ascending position, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed, the one that moves to the descending position is used. Although shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the ascending position, the downward movement may be restricted after the pressing operation unit 303 moves slightly downward from the ascending position.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit 200 having the rotation operation unit 302 provided on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 protruding forward is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is provided inside the dish unit. In addition to the arrangement, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to entertain the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a that communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is provided in the main body frame 4, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 102, 154, and 103 to 120. 102 and 154 are block diagrams of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. Further, FIG. 103 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 102, and FIG. 104 is a connection terminal for a game ball or the like lending device that relays an electrical connection between a payout control board constituting the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to and from the board, FIG. 105 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 154, FIG. It is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a section.

In the above-described embodiment, the door frame 3 is not provided with the effect display device related to the effect display. However, in the following description, apart from the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5, the door frame side effect display device 460 (see FIG. 107) related to the effect display can also be provided on the door frame 3. Will be described as a control configuration.

As shown in FIG. 102, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly composed of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the payout control board 633, the power supply board 630, and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on, and also performs the game operation. The detection signals from the main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in various control programs such as the main control program to be controlled, a ROM for storing various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 1310b, main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and a power failure or momentary voltage of a predetermined voltage. It is mainly equipped with a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of stoppage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a big hit determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game by hardware. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (1 value within a predetermined numerical range) as an initial value and is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When this is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball that has entered the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Is entered in. Further, the gate sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 99, the large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 100 The detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 attached to the game board 5 to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 3031 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 3031, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1404 via the panel relay board 3031 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol indicator 1406, 1st special hold number indicator 1405, 2nd special hold number indicator 1407, normal symbol indicator 1402, status indicator 1401, and round indicator 1408 to output drive signals. To do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 633 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the grand prize opening sensor 2403 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the second start port sensor 2402, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the big winning opening sensor 2403 also frequently detects the game ball. For this reason, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the large winning opening sensor 2403. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001,2201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001, 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensors 3001 and 4020 use a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 633. When the payout control board 633 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides the bus 1310ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 112). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. See 112). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 108) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 633 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball displays the state of the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to the payout, the operation switch 954 that also has various functions, and the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display 860b and the like are provided. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 103, the payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various control programs including payout control programs that control operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. To output drive signals to the payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, the payout control output circuit 952c to output various signals to an external board, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 89. The payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error release navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program pays out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program also issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. It is composed of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to the external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball cut detection sensor 574 that detects the ball out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560, and the payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout ports 831b and 832b of the payout device 580. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is stored is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 630 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, thereby performing payout control without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 584, and outputs the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED display 860b.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball mesh with each other in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, the payout detection sensor 591 is abnormal based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). Is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that there is a "retry error" (specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (there is a prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information, error details related to the payout operation of the game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hole. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 633 that controls the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending display unit, such as a game ball. It is output to the rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball rental display unit. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 108) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 633 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU952a uses the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 633a and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. As shown in FIG. 125, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 633, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 633, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 633, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball rental display unit, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the rental balance display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

In the ball return display unit, three segment indicators are arranged side by side in a row, and one digit of these three digit segment indicators is sequentially driven one by one, which is a so-called dynamic lighting method. The segment display of is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit uses digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating one digit segment display among the three digit segment display, and the designated one digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board. When input via 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators are emitted in sequence. The contents of the light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental display unit. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 630 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of balls of the game ball paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 630]
Next, the power supply board 630 will be briefly described. The power supply board 630 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island equipment and capable of electrically connecting or electrically shutting off AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 633b that controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG. 1 is provided.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. It includes a power supply creation circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145, mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182, and a palm on the handle 182. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the player is touching or a finger, and a single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 633. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 542. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper dish 321 of the dish unit 320. , The game ball received by the ball feeding member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in FIG. While performing drawing control of the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data) with the display drive board 4450, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side effect display device 460, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") that holds a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from 573, calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. A control unit 4165 and a volume adjusting volume 1510a for adjusting the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob unit are provided.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LEDs, and other light emitting modes) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc. that defines the above, and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special information). Peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for managing production flags, and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally. ”) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 630. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 630 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. Door-side motor drive for transmitting data from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serials I. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter, referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets when the watchdog timer is started and does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period of time (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to the game production are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. However, when an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids is specified.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments, and the current brightness setting information. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 106, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information that is updated when various control programs are executed. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 143) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. (For example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 123 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is a production information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a Since the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V-blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" is defined as "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap and the like are provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set. In the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are set. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of abnormalities and the state of occurrence of abnormalities between the connections with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511ca of Bank0 (1fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. LED. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. This is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are commanded when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 122). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 103 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used to manage various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and a special effect flag), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 1511dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with built-in sound source, various sound such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial to the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The converted drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. A speaker IC 1512d for directing the door frame side to transmit, and a differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is transmitted. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. I have. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu to be used Background image data, selected display image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the rear image data of the main frame used for displaying the rear image of the main frame, which allows the position of each part on the back of the main frame 4 to be visually recognized by the player, and the display of the service mode screen. The service mode screen image data used for the above, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is set to 1511cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 107 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display arranged in the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. Since the control board 1510 outputs the output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is used by THine Electronics Inc.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 is LVDS (Low Voltage Differential).
While a differential interface based on a serial system called Signaling) is used, the channel CH2 uses an interface based on a parallel system. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, sprite data is created, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 to display image data for the effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting the drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, in the sound effect built-in VDP1512a, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 107, the music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined to obtain the volume of the combined production sound. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the volume flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being amplified to the master volume value. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the combined production sound volume is actually combined with the volume actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified master volume value is amplified, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sound data used are used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, is combined and this is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the abnormality of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. To explain, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound. The sound data of the track in which is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound proceeds according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound is forcibly set to mute. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed. If the mode is adjusted by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound is set), and the sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, the production is produced. Although the volume of the sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted production sound is proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data, so that the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period of time. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It has come to start flowing again from.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 107, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b are for drawing on the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses the right side audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data, which is not shown in the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 107, drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal, and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three image signals, a red image signal, a green image signal, and a blue image signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronous signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is obtained from the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 580, the game ball paid out by the payout device 580 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.

Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 560 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged as a unit in which the power supply board 630 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility are integrated. In this way, the various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 580, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 630, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 584 provided in the payout device 580, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is such that it receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential paired cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. In contrast to channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, where the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Even if it adopts a differential communication method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Inc. and is less susceptible to noise, the configuration with such hardware alone will result in electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise that has entered the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the door frame side effect display device 460 can reliably display the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent an image such as a sandstorm that cannot be recognized at all from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later. And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 3, various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. As a result, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 to remove various wirings, and then the door frame 3 is removed from the main body frame 4, so that the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained. If the abnormality that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the abnormality, and the door frame 3 is attached. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the substrate.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal plates such as a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal plates.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminals 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. One of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, and the harness that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be housed. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is input as a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential type serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two differential signals, a positive signal and a negative signal, are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

When the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, various serialized effects are generated. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image for notifying that when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") is transmitted to that effect. (Please call a clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side production display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ an abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 105, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. Based on the effect, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type, the input date and time information, and the like. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program to produce the game board side effect when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of an abnormality in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. Etc.), but the notification sound and the notification sound also flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and from the mute. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, when an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation portion 401 of the production operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the pachinko / pachislot machine side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration while waiting for customers, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and cases where the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume adjusting volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the production operation unit 400 You can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 to increase the volume to the desired level, and if you feel the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is not playing is continued for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, he / she will be seated in the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effects are noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can use the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 109 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 108. First, the power supply board 630 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GNDs) of the various substrates and the grounds (GNDs) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of the power supply substrate 630 and are the same grounds (GNDs).

[8-1. Power supply board 630]
The power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the pachinko island equipment. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 630, and the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

As shown in FIG. 108, the power supply board 630 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a launch control unit 633b. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and is a emission control. Section 633b is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 542 of the ball striking device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 145 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 630, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 633b, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 633b uses + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the ball feed unit 250 and outputting it to the launch solenoid 542, the ball feed unit 250 outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 250. The ball feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 633 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 633 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 633 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 633. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 633 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 633. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 which are in the forward direction by the diode PD0. A current flows toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is returned from the payout control board 633 and the power supply board 630 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 to the power supply board 630. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB via the payout control board 633. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 108, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 are supplied to the payout control board 633, and of these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. In addition, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630, are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and are peripheral through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 109A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates DC 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 109 (b). The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 107, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the payout control board 633 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 630, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a. The + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 633. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 without being used in the payout control board 633.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied via the payout control board 633, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 109 (b) via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage to be output, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112. FIG. 110 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 111 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 112 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 108 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 154 and 110. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 110, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 110, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly comprises the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 110, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 110, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal, respectively.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is from the general winning opening sensor 3001, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the large winning opening sensor 2403, and the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of the above, the circuit is such that an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built into the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 633, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and the main control built-in RAM is cleared.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 633. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 633 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 110, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 633 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 633 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 633 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 633. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 3001, the first starting port sensor 3002, and the second starting port sensor 2402, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the gate sensor 2401 input via the panel relay board 3031 shown in FIG. 123 are the main control board. Since it is not directly input to 1310, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 633 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 111, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 111, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 24V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
Monitoring of a + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 111, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25 to + 12V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the + 12V voltage is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 5V due to the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the D type flip-flop MIC 22 releases the latch state and transfers the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, signals from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, are input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout control board 633 as a payout power failure warning signal, and outputs the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 111, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 633 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 111. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 633a shown in FIG. 113 on the payout control board 633. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 633.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. 111. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness).
When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 105. In the above, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 105. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 633. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is connected to the payout control board via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a in 633, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 on the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 633 and the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, The power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 110. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 110 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 633 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 633, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 633 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first start port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 110 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 633, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with respect to the start port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2404 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1404 shown in FIG. 123 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 633.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is supplied via the payout control board 633, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the above.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 110 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, which is + 5V.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main-circle serial data from the shift register 1310aea, a main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal No. 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 110 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal for the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 630 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when electricity or momentary power failure occurs, the main control serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circle serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main-circle serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main-circle serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 ensures that the data is received without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and when the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the main control output circuit 1310cc, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be interrupted, and it is possible to prevent the command from being missing. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after a power failure occurs or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 118. FIG. 113 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit and the like, FIG. 114 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 115 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 114, and FIG. 116 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 117 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 118 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 113, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 630 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 to smooth the filter. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will cause a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 108 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 633, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 633, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB.

[10-2. Payout control unit circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 633a resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 113, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is in a state of being electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 113, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 108. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 124, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input via the power supply board 630, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 123 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 123 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame release switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while when the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 154 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who says that the door is in a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 630, and when the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 633 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 633, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 633.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 633, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 633, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted through the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. Is entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed by the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630. When the signal that the pull-up resistor 44a pulls up to the + 12V side in the payout control board 633 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 633, while the accommodation space is filled with the stored game balls. , A signal in which the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 633.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is applied to the payout control board 633 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 630. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 154 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 630 to the payout control board. At 633, when the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 154 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball cut detection sensor 574 and the payout detection sensor 591 provided in the payout device 580 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 154 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal from 154, the drive control of the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 584 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 584 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 584 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the payout motor 584, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body breaks down. is there. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 110 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 633 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on) It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). ) Is an error release signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of the above, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42, the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR 43 in the rear stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the operation switch 954's output terminals, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 116 will be described. As shown in FIG. 116, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 3 and 10 of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 584. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 584.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 584. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the base terminals 1, 1, 5, and 8 and 12 respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 584, and rotate the payout motor 584. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 117 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 633 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 125 are supplied, while the payout control board 633 connects the rental device such as a game ball. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 117, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 113 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is changed, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as the CR connection signal 1.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 630 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 630 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 630. To.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 630 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 630. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the optocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is changed, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The EXE signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 bc to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or not possible from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Is entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 113, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door open signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574, the payout detection sensor 591, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 124 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 cc without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 124 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 633 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 118.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 633 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the payout control board 633 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 633 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 rounds big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 633 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal. A game information signal such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 633 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 633.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of big hits in the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits in the pachinko machine 1. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. Absent.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 119. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 comprises an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 633, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player in which the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is obtained every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and the main prize ball number information output signals are various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning ports 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on the game ball entered in, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal generates a 15-round jackpot. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being displayed, and the special symbol display information output signal is a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal indicating that the variation display has been completed (stopped), and the normal symbol display information output signal ends the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. This is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 119, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal plate 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is provided in green to output an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. This is a signal to convey that, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406, and the number of times is counted to count the number of times, and the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406.

The output terminal PT4 is provided in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start port winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the start port 2004, and count the number of times the start port winning information output signal is input to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is provided in blue to output a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is colored in red to output a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. In addition to being able to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time saving, it is possible to grasp the total number of times the time saving state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during the probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. In addition to being able to grasp that there is, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the ball has reached 10, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered in various winning ports such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning opening 2001, 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. It is designed to be output at intervals of 0.128 seconds, as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 633 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 633. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having a connector that is colored in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 633 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 633 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center to the right side, in this respect as well, the wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 633 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer.

In the present embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is because, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a 15-round jackpot happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls will be insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 580, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, in the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 633 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 633 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk in the hall, for example, checks the hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying the game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball clogging (also occurs in the payout device 580, for example). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball hose) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits are completed, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall. When the game returns to the above state, the payout control board 633 pays out the unpaid game balls one after another, and the payout control board 633 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify each time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as prize balls reaches 10, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 584 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 633 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 633. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2,201, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. When the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the above, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 784 are displayed. Through this, we adopted a mechanism to convey information to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 580, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of game balls to be released and the number of balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 120 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit that draws a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 120, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a serial signal (serial data) from the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before being serialized). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are 8 bits each. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two differential signals, the positive signal and the negative signal, are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so that it does. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected in a circuit so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored in the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 and the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. Assuming that the data is used, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application sheet, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded to the ground, respectively.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and a + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logical) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as a ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3 V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3 V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, The door frame side production receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, but for some reason, it is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. For the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal plate 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the doors. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that conveys that the data output from the D0 terminals to the D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, is valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal are three video signals (18), which are a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 to 122. FIG. 121 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 122 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 123 Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 122, and FIG. 124 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is detected from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the large winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 123. When the signal is input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 584 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 580) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out game balls as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 121 (a), a main control board. Commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 633, and one prize ball is specified in command 10H, and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machines are installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the payout control board 633 is connected to the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH gives a prize. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 121 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 122 and 123, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 123, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 99 as shown in FIG. 122. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1404. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and time-saving states include a low-probability time-saving state that indicates a low-probability state and a time-saving state, a high-probability time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state and a time-saving state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 99. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. In addition to increasing the number of stops displayed compared to the non-time saving state, by increasing the acceptance rate (entry rate) of game balls to the second starting port 2004, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for special symbols without reducing the number of balls held. (In other words, compared to the non-time saving state, more decisions are made as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces, and when the pair of movable pieces are opened / closed, the pair of movable pieces is opened / closed. By lengthening the operation period, the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is increased).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronized production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123 as shown in FIG. 122. It is composed of commands named Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect Start, Special Symbol 2 Designation, and Special Figure 2 Synchronized Effect End for the second special symbol display 1406. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 122, the big hit related category includes the big hit opening, the big winning opening 1 open Nth display, the big winning opening 1 closed display, the big winning opening 1 count display, the big hit ending, the big hit symbol display, and the small hit opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 99). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command during the round starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 123). The number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403) is transmitted, the big hit ending command indicates the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is , The jackpot symbol information display is instructed.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command indicates (opening start), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (the game ball that entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403). The small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is transmitted at the time of opening the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2005), and the command for displaying the closing of the large winning opening 1 is transmitted at the time of closing the large winning opening 1 (starting closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005. Is transmitted by the big winning opening sensor 2403), the big hit ending command is sent at the start of the big hit ending, and the big hit symbol display command is sent when the big winning opening is opened (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). It is sent at the time of opening).

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 during the small hit), and the small hit ending The command is sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 122, the power-on category includes commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. ) With information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuations occur). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to identify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. 123 and information indicating the driving state of the large winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 122. It is configured.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Is also sent to.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal symbol tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 123, and the classification is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 123 as shown in FIG. 123. It is composed of commands related to 1402, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It is composed of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state indicating that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state indicating that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service production-related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which can be opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2404 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named opening, solenoid open display, and ending per solenoid. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2404). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is left and right when the normal power is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the start port solenoid 2404). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 other than during the big hit (when the condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). (When the large winning opening sensor 2403 detects), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electric in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. When there is a connection abnormality, the connection abnormality notification is instructed to start, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the like. When the electrical connection with the grand prize opening sensor 2403 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is the magnetic detection shown in FIG. 123. When an abnormality occurs in the sensor 4024, the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification is instructed to start.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the state is set. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 refers to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, it instructs the end of the main body frame opening notification.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633. It is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 633 when the command is transmitted to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the large winning port sensor. It is transmitted when any of 2403 and the like is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame open is detected (when the main body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 124, the status display division is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to an error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 633, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. 124. Along with setting it as a status, the received command is set as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 123, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 105. It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the power is restored from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. It is executed and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 123, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). This is indicated in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, respectively. The state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortened non-operating state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is to hold 0 to 4 special symbols 2 (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol. The number of balls (the number of balls (holding number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400. Based on this, the first special symbol display 1404 instructs the start of the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before it is used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1406, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1406 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used at the time of starting port winning (when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 3002, or the second. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 2402), the speaker 622 shown in FIG. 72 and the upper speaker 464 shown in FIG. The fluctuation shortening operation end specification command is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end specification command is It is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted, and the special symbol 1 storage command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation pending balls changes. (When a game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400, the first start port is further set. It is transmitted when a game ball enters in 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol on the first special symbol display 1404 and the number of holdings decreases). The special symbol 2 storage command is still displayed when the number of balls on hold for operation of special symbol 2 changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 displays the fluctuation of the special symbol. When there is an unused number of holds, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds increases, the second special symbol display 1406 displays fluctuations in the special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is reduced, the normal symbol memory command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 is changed (when the game ball passes through the gate 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol in the device 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball enters the first starting port 2002). The special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls is increased (when the number of reserved balls is increased), and the number of reserved balls is increased when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation is increased (when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, or when the second starting opening is entered. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2402), it is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify the fact by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in the above uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 633 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 124, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 633 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when the ball is out. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to a value 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball-shaped, payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball-shaped ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game ball is repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bits 1 (B1) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 125 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 125, and FIG. 127 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 102, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game state, which is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 when a small hit game state is generated. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of the random number for the small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8 and a random number for determining normal symbol hit are used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the ordinary symbol, and the random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variablely displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. 102. It is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 102. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 110), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. To do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the normal symbol hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. ..

In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 103 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the processing at the time of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value is stored in the main control side power off processing (power off). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. 154. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code, performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for determining a normal symbol hit will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. 99 is opened and closed to open and close the second starting port. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 125 and 126 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be updated.

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 154 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for setting the initial value in the main control built-in WDT1310af that monitors whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally (hereinafter, "" The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a is reached by the time when the timed time reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT1310af is activated and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time is reached by the time set by the timer setting value, the timer clear setting value is set. The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this power failure clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power failure clear process, the power failure clear signal is first output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process that initializes the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Set to the state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the effect display device 1600 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 126 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When the power failure warning signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, the main control program sets the calculated checksum value (sum value) as the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores the game backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power off processing described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and then returned is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the main control side power off processing described later is normally completed and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control internal RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken-out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit. To do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510). ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 154 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is determined in advance at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 131). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 122 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. is there. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable setting (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. The execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to send the detection signal input in connection with the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). Game control side normal operation control means), it is treated as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error release unit), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error that occurred in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error release unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after the lapse of the predetermined time, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and if there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes the start port solenoid 2404, the large winning opening sensor 2405, the first special symbol display 1404, the second special symbol display 1406, and the first special hold number display shown in FIG. 102. The drive signal output to the device 1405, the second special hold number display 1407, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1408, etc. is stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control side power-on processing is performed.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, a point will be described in which the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the system for performing the effect display device 1600 and the drawing control by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 as shown in FIG. 105 is started. If the waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) is started to be timed and the waiting time is reached, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. Although the charge charged in the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within a period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt initial setting is performed. By setting the interrupt permission in step S52, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power is turned off in the main control side power on processing. It may not be possible to complete the time processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the processing at the time of turning on the power of the main control side is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without causing a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM is completed. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no manifestation of intention by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af started in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the time counting is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 131 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process of power failure on the main control side composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power off processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, it has been so far. As you can see, the processing when the power is cut off on the main control side can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the processing when the main control side power is turned on at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power supply cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. If the power failure warning signal has been input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeating the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. Since the time measurement cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt processing on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one that is covered by hardware so that the power failure processing is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified into power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the large winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 43. Has been done. Here, first, the main control return destination command when the power is turned on includes information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the large winning opening sensor 2405 shown in FIG. 122. A problem in the case where there is no such command, that is, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the big hit game state (for example, the screen of the big hit game effect) in the display area of the effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 100, the main control board 1310 is the big winning opening. When the sensor 2405 is driven and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99 is opened by the opening / closing member, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 controls the main control in step S34. Main control in the setting of the work area of the built-in RAM Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored, and the large winning opening sensor 2405 The winning opening 2005 shifts from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member to the state of being opened.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and time saving state, the jackpot game state It is not possible to display at all which round of the throat. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005, is detected by the large winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102, and a large winning opening 1 count display that conveys the number of balls of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command, the peripheral control board 1510 is a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number of balls can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) of the big hit game state, the driving of the big winning opening sensor 2405 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 2107. A large winning opening 1 closing display command is issued from the main control board 1310 to instruct the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the big winning opening sensor 2405 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the large winning opening 2005). It is transmitted to the substrate 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Further, for example, a screen for notifying the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed to the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2404 to expand the screen while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Occasionally, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the information, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the start port solenoid 2404 is started to be driven, and the pair of movable pieces stand up substantially vertically in the left-right direction. It will shift to the expanded state.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when the power is restored, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen to be transmitted in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the gaming state is possible, and in such a case, the gaming state is returned to the gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the screen instructing the game to put the game ball into the second starting port 2004). There was also the problem of not knowing what kind of game a person would play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 122. And are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the large winning opening sensor 2405 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2107. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is changed to the state in which the game is being performed, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen (that is, how many rounds) that specifies that the four rounds are in the jackpot game state. Although the screen shown) cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a big hit game state and the big winning opening sensor 2405 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that tells the player that "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning opening.") Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine can be instructed to play a game in which the game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. In the above example, in a state where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored. , A screen telling that the start port solenoid 2404 has been started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces have been expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "Expand the movable pieces". The peripheral control board 1510 displays the message "Please play the game so that the game ball enters the lower start port" to the player in the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is possible to instruct a player seated on the front surface of the machine to play a game in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored after that, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored. Can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection step, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. 122 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. Then, in these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 124 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 shown is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the time of power recovery to recover), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is restored. It is composed of information instructing whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), and the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, cartoon E, and cartoon F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing on the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will be on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310s are sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 while being mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the above to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt processing on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the workers on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turn on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can perform the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuates, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is for the copyright. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 125 and 126.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 127 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main control side, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing is the second to the second register bank. Switch the register bank to the register tank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 633. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for informing that has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 shown in FIG. 99 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001,2201 shown in FIG. 99, FIG. 99. Detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 102 The detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 shown in FIG. 102 and the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 99 are detected. Detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 shown in FIG. 102, detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 shown in FIG. 102 to detect a game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 99. , The detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 shown in FIG. 102 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 99, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 102. The detection signal and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that conveys that the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 102 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read and input information. Is stored in the input information storage area. Further, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 102 and classified into other categories is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning openings 2001, 2201, and a large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005. Detection signal from, detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start port 2002, second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball that entered the second start port 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After that, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program transmits the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401. By performing a total of two readings, one for the first to third readings to be compared and the other for the second to fourth readings, a total of two readings, due to the effects of chattering and noise, etc. Since false detection can be avoided, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401 Reliability can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control program performs the winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 126, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit judgment can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process in which one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 126. The winning random number is updated in the winning random number update processing and the winning random number update processing in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer occurs, and the next If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs the prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 121 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of planned game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 121 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 may be created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 99, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 633. If the number of game balls to be paid out exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the number of added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 633, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 122. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 102 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). Navi command and frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005) Creates a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102 as an abnormal state, and stores the transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 102, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or taking out the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol and storing it in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM matches in advance, a random number for jackpot determination (that is, a random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 2402. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 is set so as to light the device 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. To do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit shown in FIG. 122 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 99 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the large winning opening sensor 2405 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state (round) twice. , The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a is set so as to light the 2-round indicator lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. 10, and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or the round is 15 When it is the number of times, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1408 shown in FIG. 10, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information. , The output of the lighting signal to the state indicator 1401 is set so as to light the presence / absence of the occurrence of the probability fluctuation in a predetermined color, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. 122 Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation display pattern random number. A display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 122 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the big prize opening sensor 2405 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and it is driven by the starting port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting signals, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 633.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 122, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Based on the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 (see FIG. 102) when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 99) is detected. Large winning opening 1 count display command equivalent to the large winning opening count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to the normal figure synchronization production, various commands classified as related to the ordinary electric role production, Various commands classified into the notification display (door opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, etc.) and various commands classified into the status display (frame state 1 command, shown in FIG. 102). Error release navigation command and frame state 2 command), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the charged charge to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 110 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aa built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 112 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data. In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 126 when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. , Status, which configures the power-on status command as main-circle serial data, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit) ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 124 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 123.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 The error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 102.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 102. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 633 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (1st main body frame closing command) A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 102.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 102. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 633 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control) A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 122 received from the payout control board 633 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 102.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 102 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is used as the backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information in which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the main control return destination command at power-on of FIG. 122, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2404 and the grand prize opening sensor 2405, which are the electric drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine, is peripherally controlled. It can be output to the substrate 1510. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reserved setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 126. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the display area of the effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. Can be displayed in the production. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is quickly restored after the power is restored. At the same time, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, that is, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 125 shows. In step S38 in the process when the power is turned on on the main control side, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 122 is performed. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configures the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the process inspection device. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[15. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 124 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 144. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit of FIG. 128, and FIG. 127 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 129. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the rotation detection sensor history creation processing, and FIG. 133 is a sprocket. FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball squeeze determination process, and FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, and FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball operation determination setting process. 139 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process, FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball-shaped motion setting process, and FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 142. Is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process, and FIG. 144 is a signal process (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, from the CR unit. It is a timing chart which shows the input signal confirmation processing (a) of.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball squeeze judgment processing, and prize. Ball prize ball stock number addition process, ball rental prize ball stock number addition process, stock monitoring process, payout ball motion judgment setting process, payout setting process, ball ball motion setting process, retry motion monitoring process, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls, prize ball stock number addition processing for rental balls, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball motion determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation detection sensor history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball addition judgment processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset judgment processing, error release operation judgment processing, prize ball stock number for prize balls The priority is set in the order of addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball movement determination setting processing.

[15-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a and turns on the power of the payout control unit as shown in FIGS. 128 to 127. Perform time processing. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control program sets the interrupt mode for the payout control MPU952a (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU952a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, the payout control program performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU952a are set.

Following step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954, and it is determined that the operation switch does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. When it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the operation switch 954 is operated. judge.

When the operation switch 954 is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process that initializes the RAM built in the payout control MPU952a (hereinafter, referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. (Delivery control side power-on operation control means). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU952a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, various information). The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information whose status is set), and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Will be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU952a.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates the checksum (step S524). This checksum considers the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S524, the payout control program determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power cutoff process (when the power is turned off), which will be described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and is set to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU952a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). Then, this power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, which is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset judgment time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step. When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed, the payout control program covers the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clear process when the operation signal of the operation switch 954 is detected (the payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). This setting reads the initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control program sets the interrupt enable setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is used as the main control board 1310. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S540, the payout control program determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input. To judge.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control program performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU952a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 121) have been normally received, payer ACK information, and payout motor 584 Various information such as drive information for driving control to, prize ball number information for the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b is stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or the payout motor. A drive signal may be output to 584, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 may be output to the external terminal plate 558 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays 10 balls). A prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time each game ball is paid out. Specifically, a prize ball number information signal output determination counter for outputting prize ball number information is provided. The prize ball number information signal output determination counter is used to determine the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later. It counts based on the detection signal of, and is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. The process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value of the signal output determination counter based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 described later. In step S548, the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and the value of the read prize ball number information signal output determination counter exceeds the value 10. At this time, the prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 558, and the excess number of balls is used as the value of the prize ball number information signal output determination counter to store the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. Memory is updated to the area ing. ), The display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

Following step S548, the payout control program performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU952a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 954, the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection. The signal and the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys that the main control board 1310 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. To do.

Following step S550, the payout control program performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not a ball is in a ball-sucking state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball is determined as a judgment condition. Time, skip judgment time set when the fixed position judgment of the payout rotating body is not performed, ball removal judgment set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 803 Time, full tank determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is stored is full, and ball out detection When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the sensor 574, the ball out determination time set as the determination condition is set. In addition to managing the time, etc., the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body does not match the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Inconsistency counter for monitoring whether or not the game ball is paid out repeatedly Time management of the inconsistency counter reset determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the INCC. I do. For example, when the ball squeeze judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, each time this timer update process is performed, the sphere squeeze judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is obtained. When the value becomes 0, the ball squeeze judgment time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. The withdrawal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, the payout control program performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit 6, the payout control MPU952a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6.
In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc. in which the logical state of the signal is set).

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball is being executed by the payout device 580 and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU952a momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. It has become like.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 is momentarily stopped or stopped, it is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop at the time of power recovery. The various signals by the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU952a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU952a. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball is in the movement judgment setting process. , As a setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal telling that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit 6. It is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU952a. Outputs to the CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At the stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is paid out to the CR unit 6. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball by the device 580 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, the pachinko machine. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, the lending ball is to be paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set as HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, that is, When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869, the payout ball is paid out. In order to convey that the payout operation is not possible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. The logical state of the EXE signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored with the payout control board 633. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control program performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 270 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the above-mentioned payout device 580 by the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms is used to detect the full tank in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process. When the detection signal from the sensor 154 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is When the transition from OFF to ON is performed, the timer update process in step S552 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 ON in this full tank and ball out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full in the stored game ball is the state information described above. Store in the storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area. To do.

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the detection sensor 574 is ON, and the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 When transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 starts the timing of the ball-out determination time (119 ms) described above. Then, when the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, is the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 ON in this full tank and ball-out check process? Judge whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball-cutting information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball runs out. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control program performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 121) are received.
When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control program performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the payout control program performs the main operation setting process (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball pulling, and ball scooping are performed, retry motion is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, the payout control program performs the LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b of the payout control board 633 is created, and the output information storage area described above is used as the LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, the corresponding display data ( In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 122 based on the various information. Create a command, a main body frame closing command, a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error release navigation command (corresponding to the first error release command), and a frame state 2 command) to create the main control board 1310. Send to. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created based on the ball-out information when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number. Then, it is transmitted to the main control board 1310. Further, in this command transmission process, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error related to the payout operation of the game ball, the payout control program provides information on the part where the error occurs related to the payout operation (hereinafter, A frame state 1 command (first error release command) including "error occurrence position information") is generated (error occurrence command generation means). On the other hand, in this command transmission process, the above-mentioned error occurs when the payout control program detects that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 1, that is, an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 954 is detected. Output the release navigation command (first error release command) (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) when a main body frame opening detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619 (main body frame command sending means, first 1 main body frame command sending means). B. Ayumu, this payout control program transmits a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) when a main body frame closing detection signal is input from the main body frame opening switch 619 (main body frame command sending means). , First main body frame command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) when a door frame opening detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch 618 (door frame command sending means, first 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, first 1 door frame command sending means). Further, in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S566), this payout control program reads error information including error contents from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and has unit number information for distinguishing itself from other pachinko machines. The error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the hall computer receives this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall clerk, and the hall clerk provides the unit number pachinko machine based on the unit number information. In, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input in step S540. If the determination is made and there is no input of this power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. In other words, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and the port output process is performed in step S548. , Step S550 performs port input processing, step S552 performs timer update processing, step S554 performs CR communication processing, step S556 performs full tank and ball out check processing, and step S558 performs command reception processing. Command analysis processing is performed in step S560, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568. C is set, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU952a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU952a preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU952a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control program sets the watchdog timer to clear (step S576). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is regarded as a numerical value, and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout control program sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, the payout control program sets the prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU952a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on processing again under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (pain control MPU952a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[15-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 128 to 129.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 sets the payout control program to disable the timer interrupt as shown in FIG. 131 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. To switch (save) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the timer interrupt processing of the payout control unit, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the payout control program sets the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) registers (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the payout control program sets interrupt enable (step S596) and ends this routine.

[15-3. Rotation detection sensor history creation process]
Next, the rotation detection sensor history creation process will be described. In this rotation detection sensor history creation process, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 124 is created.

When the rotation detection sensor history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program detects rotation from the payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. 132. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S610). This rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is stored in the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation detection sensor detection history information LSB-HIST. In step S610, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area.

Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840. When there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program has a detection slit for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the blocked state to the non-blocked state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S614). In this shift process of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

Following step S614, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 1 (step S616), and ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation detection sensor detection history information (step S618). .. In the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation detection sensor detection history information in step S614, and the rotation detection sensor detection history information LSB-HIST read in step S610. From the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, such as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0. Shifts bit by bit.

Following step S618, the payout control program sets the least significant bit B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST to a value 0 (step S620), and ends this routine.

In this way, each time the rotation detection sensor history creation process is performed, the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit rotates. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or a value of 1 depending on the state in which the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state or the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the detection sensor 840 from the non-blocked state to the blocked state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 can be created.

[15-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the payout device 580 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not squeezed.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and as shown in FIG. 133, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP- It is determined whether or not the FLG has a value of 0 (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the value is 1, and the payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the fixed position of the body is determined (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program determines the rotation detection sensor history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not the value matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0 and a lower 4 bits. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit described above is the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 in succession in four timer interrupt cycles. Means that it is in a state of transition from a blocked state to a non-blocked state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 shown in FIG. 124 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the payout rotating body due to this backlash Since the rotation is designed to correspond to the rotation of about two steps of the payout motor 584, in the present embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body, the rotation detection sensor 840 is used. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation detection sensor history creation process shown in the history of the detection signal and FIG. 132, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, It is performed based on the detection signal from the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 584 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotation position of the payout motor 584. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. A value of 1 is set in the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU952a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the payout control program effectively sets the skip determination time (step S638) and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 584 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 584.

The payout control program manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 584 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. Specifically, (1) a transient state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from a blocking state to a non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit detects rotation. A state in which the optical axis of the sensor 840 is transitioned from a blocked state to a non-blocked state (referred to as a “fixed position fixed state”), and (3) a detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from a non-blocked state to a blocked state. It is managed in three states: the state in which it is set (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to the rotation of one step of the payout motor 584, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 584, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). This corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 584 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection panel, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is the time for 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 584. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes effective in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. The payout control MPU952a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result reaches a value of 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to an initial value of 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 1 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. .. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU952a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 802 and the tank rail 803, taken into the supply passage of the payout device 580, and guided to the payout device 580. When the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the payout device 580 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. The payout device 580 is provided with a rotation detection sensor 840, and the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-mentioned fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitional state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is improved. As described above, the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[15-5. Ball shaving judgment processing]
Next, the ball bending determination process will be described. This ball squeeze determination process determines whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze determination process is started, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 detects rotation from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. 134. The sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S640).

Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. This routine is terminated as it is, assuming that the detection slit has changed the optical axis of the rotation detection sensor 840 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball is not in a squeezing state. To do.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball is flagged. The value 1 is set in the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squashing state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 584 is performing a ball-sucking operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the payout control program effectively sets the ball squeeze determination time (step S646) and ends this routine. When the ball squeeze determination time becomes effective, the sphere squeeze determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. ..

[15-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processes will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls and a prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, and the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is performed from the main control board 1310. It is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the prize ball command described later, and the process of adding the number of prize balls for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In the present embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the number of prize ball stocks added in this prize ball stock number addition process is adjusted. After the game balls are paid out by the payout device 580, the number of prize ball stocks for lending is added.

[15-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program issues a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 135 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. It is determined whether or not there is (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as the received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether or not it is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program sends this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read out from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the payout device 580, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, it has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). There is. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from a value of 0 to a value of 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from this prize ball information storage area.

The payout control program adds the number of prize balls PBV read in step S652 to the number of prize ball stocks PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. After adding in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[15-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental]
Next, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending will be described. When the process of adding the number of prize balls for ball rental is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program requests the ball rental as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when there is a ball lending request signal in step S660, the payout control program receives the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the number of rented balls RBV is added to the prize ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is terminated. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball lending request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the ball lending are managed separately), the ball lending request signal is held even when there is a ball lending request signal. , The loan ball will be paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball loan is paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS reaches a value of 0.

[15-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues the game during the game with the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and as shown in FIG. 137, the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value of 1 (step S674) and ends this routine. With this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stock described above) becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that the value has been reached, and is set to a value 1 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is reached, and a value 0 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is not reached.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value 0 (step S676) and ends this routine.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and looks at the effect unfolded by the effect display device 1600 and shown in FIG. 105, the player inadvertently pays as a prize ball for one round. The released game ball may not be pulled out from the lower plate 322 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 263. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases to be equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH, and the door frame 3 is provided as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards flash. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be pulled out from the lower plate 322, and the player can fill the lower plate 322 (accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall to call attention to the player's game at the earliest possible stage.

[15-8. Payout ball motion judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball motion determination setting process will be described. In this payout ball operation determination setting process, the payout motor 584 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, performs the ball squeeze operation, or does not perform such payout or discharge. Or, it is a process to set to either.

When the payout ball operation determination setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program has a built-in payout control as shown in FIG. 138 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 103 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the payout control program matches the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, It is determined whether or not the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retry). When the operation is normal), the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S682 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S682, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, the payout control program determines whether or not the ball-filled flag PBE-FLG is a value 1. (Step S686). The ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a sphere is squeezed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball is not performing the motion.

When the ball-squeezing flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-squeezing operation is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the region (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there is an unpaid number of balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 584.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. (Step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full.

When the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is not full in step S692, the payout control program performs the payout setting process described later (step S694), and ends this routine. In this payout setting process, a payout operation is performed in which the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is full with the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 584 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 584 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls shown in FIG. 135. Will increase.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game ball is not paid out.

On the other hand, when the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1 in step S686, that is, the ball-grinding motion is being performed, the payout control program performs the ball-grinding motion setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In this ball-grinding motion setting process, a ball-grinding motion is performed to eliminate the ball-squeezing state by the payout rotating body of the payout device 580.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S702). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704) and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU952a in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent (CR unit 6). When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. And store it in the CR communication information storage area.
As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. .. In addition, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some point (holding the XS signal up and running) is to maintain its logical HI.

[15-8-1. Payout setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 584 is driven to set the game ball to be paid out.

When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program sets the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. Read (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether or not the drive command number DRV has a value of 0 (step S712). This determination is determined based on the drive command number DRV whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 remains.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584 is zero, the payout control program stops (stops) the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. ) Is set (step S714). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S714, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and reads out the actual ball count PB (step S718). This actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. This count will be described in detail later, but from the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. It is performed based on the detection signal of. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set in the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is terminated. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are values 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not a value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 584, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584. (Step S724). In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program adds a value of 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S728, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As described above, the payout control program is in the case of decrementing the drive command number DRV in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU952a, and when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, If it is not incremented to the actual ball count PB, one ball cannot be paid out because the game ball is not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Judge. Therefore, the payout control program sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-mentioned step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out is included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, the value 1 which is one ball that should be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation of paying out the one ball that should be paid out can be performed again. .. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to extremely reduce the possibility that the game ball is not paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the unpaid game ball.

[15-8-2. Ball motion setting process]
Next, the ball-shaped motion setting process will be described. In this ball squeezing operation setting process, it is a process of setting to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program elapses the ball squeeze determination time as shown in FIG. 140 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. It is determined whether or not this has been done (step S750). This determination is made based on the ball squeeze determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the ball bending determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball squeezing determination time has elapsed.

When the ball squeeze determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation detection sensor history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S752). ..

Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program determines. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set so that the ball is squeezed (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, the drive information for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S758). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the payout control program sets the value 0 in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S760), and ends this routine. This ball-squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-squashing state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 584 is performing a ball-sucking operation. When no operation is performed (end of ball-sliding operation), the values are set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S762). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 584 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented at present, the payout control MPU952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, When it is down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the down state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. .. As described above, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of is HI (the XS signal is held up), that logic HI is maintained.

Following step S764, the payout control program sets the value 0 in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[15-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program detects the rotation of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM under the control of the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. 141. The rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the sensor history information storage area (step S770).

Following step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the ROM with built-in payout control, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program determines. The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). This mismatch counter INCC includes the number of game balls that are received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. It is a counter for calculating the difference between, and normally, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body matches the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. Therefore, the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 139, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual payout detection The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected by the sensor 591 and the inconsistent payout of the game balls due to the inconsistency are repeatedly performed. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation detection sensor detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match. Occasionally, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591.

When there is a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts a value of 1 from the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrements, step S778). ).

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is less than the inconsistency threshold INCTH (step). S780). In the pachinko machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is about 1 in millions, and in the present embodiment, the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. The value 5 is set as.

As described above, in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 127, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM at the time of power recovery. , Information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the payout device 580, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. There is. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the payout device. It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the 580 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state. Even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program determines the "retry error". In order to notify that, the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 633, is set with retry error information for displaying the number “5”, and the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area of (step S782). On the other hand, in the case of notifying that "the prize ball is in stock", the payout control program sets the information in the prize ball stock that displays the number "9" on the error LED display 860b, and has the above-mentioned built-in payout control. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

Following step S782, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the inconsistent counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, that is, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when this internal factor occurs. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 as a RAM clear signal. The above-mentioned main control program erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM under the control of the main control MPU1310a, and issues a RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. 102. Output to 1510. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 998.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating, and has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retrying operation is). It is set to 0 when it is operating normally).

Note that the payout control program shows retry error information (or information in prize ball stock) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. In the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit), a retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310, and the LED display data of step S564 in the same process is created. In the process, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process. Based on this, a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b, and the number "5" is displayed on the error LED display 860b. In the main control board 1310 that has received the state command, the main control program transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 127 to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. 105 shows a door frame side lighting / blinking command for outputting a lighting signal, in which the peripheral control board 1510 causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment). It is output to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in 1 and a plurality of LEDs are made to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs displayed the number "" on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 633 by opening the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. It can be confirmed that the "retry error" has occurred by visually observing that "5" is displayed. As a result, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, the hall clerk or the like confirms an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, poor contact of various connectors, and the like. The work can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display contents of the error LED display 860b are not notified.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. Even if a fraudulent act is performed in which the retry operation is forcibly generated and the game ball paid out by this retry operation is illegally acquired, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC described above is equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. Then, since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko machine 1. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591 can be suppressed to an extremely small value.

Further, as described above, the inconsistent counter INCC is set when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or higher than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It has been initialized when an internal factor such as the fact that it has become is generated. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when, for example, an external factor such as operating the operation switch 954 to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 954 or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU952a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. Absent.

[15-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the inconsistency counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between and.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program controls the inconsistency counter reset determination time as shown in FIG. 142 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. It is determined whether or not the elapse has passed (step S790). This determination is made based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the inconsistency counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to an initial value of 7000s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the payout control program sets the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM to a value 0 (initial value 0) (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, and the payout detection sensor 591. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, and is usually the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body, the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591, and the number of balls. Is the same, so the value is 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 139 under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the ball of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number and the number of balls actually detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are inconsistent with each other and the game balls are paid out repeatedly. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to a retry operation is paid out is about 1 in several million.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a game board 5 and a frame body such as a main body frame 4 on which the game board 5 is mounted, and the game board 5 is replaced (replacement of a new machine). Since the specifications can be changed, the payout control board 633 that controls the payout device 580, and the power supply board 630 that generates the drive power supply for the payout device 580 and the control power supply for the payout control board 633 are framed as common functions. It is equipped on the body side. In the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, it is abnormal whether or not the payout control program repeatedly performs the retry operation by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC as described above under the control of the payout control MPU952a. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 127, the inconsistency counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is turned off, while the figure In the process of step S530 (setting at the time of power recovery of the RAM work area) in the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit shown in 129, the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power-on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 5 mounted on the pachinko machine 1 is replaced with a game board 5'of another game specification different from the game board 5 and the power is turned on, the payout control board is used. The payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a in the 633 will start processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5'is mounted, the mismatch counter INCC in the pachinko machine 1 on which the game board 5 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko machine 1 equipped with the game board 5', and there is a probability of 1 in millions that the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the inconsistency counter INCC is set. When the number increases and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the above-mentioned inconsistency value INCTH, the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', and the payout control MPU952a determines that the retry operation is abnormal in a short period of time. There is a risk. That is, in a short period after the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5', the payout detection sensor 591 is abnormal, the various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633 are disconnected, and various connectors are contacted. Even though no defect has occurred, it may be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation.

In this way, when the game board 5 is replaced with the game board 5'and judged as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 5'is new, but the impression is that it is easy to break down. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is 1 in millions when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the hall's business hours. Since it is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out, there is a probability of one millionth from the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141. Only the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the value 1 is incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 1, and in two weeks, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 2. In the week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 3, and in the 4th week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 4. The value 1 is further incremented by the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value of 5, which coincides with the above-mentioned inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, since the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control program controls the payout control MPU952a, and in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141. In the judgment, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and there is an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and poor contact of various connectors. In order to notify that a "retry error" has occurred in the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141, the segment display mounted on the payout control board 633 is determined. Retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED display 860b, which is a device, and is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU952a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process, that is, every 7000s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1 in millions described above is incremented. It has been disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, poor contact of various connectors, and the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information indicating that the information is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the discharge control built-in RAM.

It should be noted that by intentionally deactivating the payout detection sensor 591, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted. In the case where the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a short period of time even if a fraudulent act of forcibly generating the retrying motion and illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retrying motion is performed, As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 emit light, so that the clerk in the hall or the like is in the state of the pachinko machine 1. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the payout detection sensor 591 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is performed every 7000 s (about 2 hours). However, during this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC up to the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and the payout detection sensor 591 is used. Even if the player intentionally repeats the non-operation state for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who commits a fraudulent act can be extremely reduced.

[15-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 124 is operated.

When the error release operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the payout control program releases the error by the operation switch 954 as shown in FIG. 143 under the control of the payout control MPU952a. It is determined whether or not the operation is performed (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area and instruct to cancel the error when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI. While it is determined that the operation switch 954 is not operated, it is determined that when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the error is cleared and the operation switch 954 is operated. It is determined that it is.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S800, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 954 is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs an error flag status confirmation process. (Step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the payout device 580 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed.
As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is operating normally). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 0 or a value 1 under the control of the payout control MPU952a.

Following step S802, the payout control program performs the state information setting process (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Set (store) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 130, and the read state is read. A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 1310. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retrying operation is abnormally operating, an error has occurred in the retrying operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127 A retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 that has received the retry error information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 by the main control program in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 127. On the control board 1510, the sub-control program performs a retry operation error notification process for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Check the harness of the payout control board" is made a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment). (2 times.) Repeatedly flowing from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 91 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 88, the clerk in the hall and the like are notified. The clerk in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation reported an abnormality in the payout detection sensor 591 shown in FIG. 124, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the payout detection sensor 591 to the payout control board 633, and contact of various connectors. Defects and the like can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

Following step S804, the payout control program performs the release setting process (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the content displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 633, is forcibly stopped or the ball can be rented. In order to convey the above-mentioned logic of the PRDY signal to HI, that is, the state in which it is started up, the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED display 860b has already displayed the error. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" that notifies that the "retry error" is present, the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is "normal". Forcibly overwrite the information in which the figure "-" that notifies the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the game ball is held from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the equal rental device connection terminal board 869.

Following step S806, the payout control program performs error flag initialization processing (step S808), and ends this routine. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. ..

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 141. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process when the operation switch 954 is operated. When the occurrence occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM in order to clear the RAM, that is, the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM. Similar to the case where the switch 954 is operated, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control side main processing is executed from the time when the power of the operation switch 954 (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error generated in the payout operation, is turned on. Instead, the operation unit for exerting the RAM clear function for starting the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) for a predetermined time until It is functioning as. Further, the pachinko machine 1 causes the operation switch 954 to function as an operation unit for canceling an error generated in the payout operation of the game ball after the lapse of the predetermined time. Here, even if the hall clerk is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he / she remembers the position of the operation switch 954 on the back of the game machine, it depends on the timing of operating the operation switch 954. If a predetermined time has passed from the time when the power is turned on, the function of canceling the error generated in the payout operation of the game ball is exerted, while the predetermined time is determined from the time when the power is turned on according to the timing when the operation switch 954 is operated. Within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation when dealing with the error and can appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The game can be restarted before the player is discouraged from playing the game.

[15-12. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 127 will be described with reference to the timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 125. First, the signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is used as the number of balls to be rented. , The case of paying out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and store it in the read input information, and perform CR communication processing. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[15-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by lending a ball]
The payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. When it is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation is possible, as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. The logic of the PRDY signal is HI, that is, it is started up and held, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a. Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed by the player, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and this ball lending operation signal is used as the TDS shown in FIG. 125. It is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 into which the TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, so that the CR unit 6 can be rented as shown in FIG. 144 (a). BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

In the payout control MPU952a to which the BRDY signal is input, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), the payout control program sets the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms) from the timing H1. By the time the set number has elapsed, the number of balls lent from the CR unit 6 via the game ball renting device connection terminal plate 869 (25 balls in the present embodiment) in one payout operation. , Equivalent to 100 yen as the amount of money.) It is monitored whether or not the BRQ, which is a signal for requesting the start of one payout operation for paying out, is started.

Of the number of game balls worth 200 yen, the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls worth 100 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

In the payout control MPU952a, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), when the BRQ signal rises before the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1, the BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment) (It is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to convey that one payout operation has started by the time elapses, the logic of the EXS signal is set as HI, that is, the payout control MPU952a is held in the activated state. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the above, and is output as an XS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 144 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the EXS is input is set to 20 ms to 58 ms from the timing H3 until the lending instruction monitoring time HC (in the present embodiment, it is set to 20 ms to 58 ms) elapses. The BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 144 (c), the payout control MPU952a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Go and pay out the predetermined number of balls to be rented, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the XS signal that is started up and held from the timing H3 is held as LOW, that is, in the downed state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H5).

Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls, FIG. 144 (b) ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate by the time when the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H5. It is output to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU952a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as the number of rented balls by using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 144 (c). , The logic of the XS signal that has been started up and held is held as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

As shown in FIG. 144 (a), the CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. 127. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the process when the power is turned on (main process of the payout control unit).

The payout control MPU952a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is squeezed, a payout detection sensor error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. occur (BRDY from the CR unit 6). When the logic is LOW, that is, when it is held down), as shown in FIG. 144 (d), the PRDY signal which is started and held from the timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state where the logic is lowered. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and dispensed. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU952a, and outputs as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. "Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI (maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal). It is to maintain its logical HI when the EXS signal is up and held).

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, and the payout control MPU952a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money and 100 as the amount of money. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a yen twice, the game balls having a loan number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322. A clerk in the hall or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, and for example, the number of game balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of rented balls such as the upper plate 321. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money once, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to be rented. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money is calculated. When the number of balls to be rented is set to be paid out to the upper plate 321 or the lower plate 322, the payout control MPU952a will perform the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[15-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
In the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, the CR unit 6 passes the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA elapses. Therefore, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 633 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned rental instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the rental device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the signal is output to the payout control board 633 via the terminal plate 869 and the signal is not shut down or the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE has passed. Even if the signal is output to the payout control board 633 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit rental completion monitoring time HF has elapsed, the CR unit 6 is BRDY. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 633 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and when the signal is not shut down, the BRQ and the BRQ and the XS described above are used. Check whether BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 144 (e) and 144 (f), the payout control MPU952a determines that the BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), and from this timing J0 to a predetermined period JA (in the present embodiment). , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the output is held from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 633a while maintaining the lowered state. Then, as a PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set as LOW, that is, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is held in the down state. It is output from the output terminal of the above, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J1 after the lapse of the predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, as HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J2). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of the predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2, and its logic is set to LOW. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J3). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is held down from the timing J3 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J4). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a sets the logic of the PRDY signal that is started and held from the timing J4 as LOW after the elapse of the predetermined period JE (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J4. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J5). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU952a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is held down from the timing J5 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 (timing J6). ).

The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process in step S552 in the payout control unit power-on time process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 127.

[16. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 to 153. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 147 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and FIG. 150 is a flowchart of LOCKN signal history creation processing. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example, FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of connection abnormality determination processing, FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of connection recovery processing, and FIG. 153 is an interrupt terminal of a door frame side effect transmitter IC. On the other hand, it is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal.

As shown in FIG. 105, the peripheral control board 1510 is composed of a peripheral control unit 1511 and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 1511 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, and LOCKN signal. The history creation process, connection abnormality determination process, and connection recovery process will be described. The LOCKN signal history creation process is executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and the connection abnormality determination process and the connection recovery process are performed when the peripheral control unit power is turned on, which will be described later. It is executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the process, and the connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 145. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 145. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 122 and 102. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. ), And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and cold start is performed.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 106 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 127. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 105 and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and displays the effect so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information is currently set as brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the effect display device 1600, is included.

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%. Occasionally, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is turned on at a brightness of 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the effect display device 1600 described above is not performed at all. It has become. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of 1ms timer interrupts, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 105. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 105. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad one byte at a time. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 107 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Output to the effect display device 1600. As a result, various screens are drawn on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the effect display device 1600 is canceled. It has become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. From the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 to various effects by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by the combined music and sound effects.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511 cage. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data to output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that make up the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electrical drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command reception means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and is based on the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound. The generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. Normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, large winning opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. 102. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 122, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 102, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as related to testing, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 102, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 102. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the effect display device. The 1600 (effect device), (effect device), and lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 633 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Based on the light emission data to be output, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. At the same time, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays it on the effect display device 1600. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 127 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to the maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music or sound effect flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 becomes small. However, when an abnormality has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of an abnormality or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. Announcement that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded by the effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful in addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, or that the game state will be favorable to the player. You can also do it.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc by using the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank 3 (1fr) and Bank 4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 127, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is high-speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 1511db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously backed up from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady-state processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer activation process is performed, each process of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be accepted, which is shown in FIG. 105, is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 125 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady-state processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 145 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 145. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether or not it has been completed. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed by the time the V-blank signal is input and the next V-blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. 145. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed this time exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 145 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 147. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145 to activate the 1 ms interrupt timer in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. It is .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 145. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 105 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is continuously transmitted by using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the constituent time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is created. The peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 127 is set in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 127 are created. The control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Acquisition of drawing state information The drawing state is acquired by acquiring the frequency of abnormalities and the occurrence state of abnormalities between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak. be able to.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 127, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank 3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511 cc, and Bank 0 (1 ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 145, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted. However, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main peripheral serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 127 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the periphery 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode which is still the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the third byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a slingshot environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 1511 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 127, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This received command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are the received command storage areas. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 111, is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation to the motor and solenoid provided on the game board 5, turning off various LEDs, and the like. By suppressing it, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 127 (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer). The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127 is peripheral. As a requirement factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc. Then, a predetermined byte (for example,) from the content stored in the start address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 1511 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is consecutive. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) are transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 1511 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 127 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 105 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a gives a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e are displayed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 147 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 120 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 128. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 becomes the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 106 as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511ca (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal, which has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511 cap as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts bit by bit from to the most significant bit B7.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection error judgment processing]
Next, a connection abnormality determination process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. In this connection abnormality determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection abnormality determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 127, as shown in FIG. 132. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is a signal to be output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 105, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no abnormality in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 An abnormality has occurred between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times in the determination of step S1522 that it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. When it is judged that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, an abnormality occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag that indicates whether or not an abnormality has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, a connection recovery process to be executed as one process of the warning process in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 151, and is the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 105 is in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145, as shown in FIG. 151. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the number of the screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule is being started. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, whether or not the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period during which the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state and the effect display device 1600 is demonstrating. It is possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is based on the screen generation schedule data, and the period during which the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the customer waiting state is established. During the period during which the production display device 1600 is performing the demonstration, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later, while the period during which the start screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the production display device 1600, or the customer waiting state When it is not the period during which the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 is being performed (simply when the customer is waiting for a customer), this routine is terminated as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the production is completed and all the pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination in step S1522 in each time the connection abnormality determination process shown in FIG. 132 is executed. The number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is counted up. (Count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has never been determined, this is performed as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT when the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the transmitter and the transmitter. A flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely abnormal. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely abnormal, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side effect. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when an abnormality has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that an abnormality has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, drawing is performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Perform processing. For example, the message "An abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Further, in the communication error display processing, during the period in which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600, or during the period in which the effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the waiting state for customers. An abnormality has occurred between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not the operation is confirmed, the peripheral control MPU1511a transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the LOCKN terminal as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. Outputs the LOCKN signal to the peripheral control MPU1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it is determined that an abnormality has occurred. Is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 by a notification image (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk."), And a notification sound (for example, " An abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. ") Is repeatedly flowed from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 107 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 153.

First, a decorative symbol that is variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described. The variation display of the decorative symbol is executed by the above means, and the main control side main process of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 126 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 102 and the like. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the timer interrupt processing on the main control side shown in FIG. 127, or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the game is a "big hit", the total number of times (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is from 1 round to 15 rounds. There are 15 rounds, and in each round, when a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is performed. It is designed to be digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the central decorative symbol is in the center, and the right side is on the right side. The variable display of the right decorative symbol is started, and after a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the player can display the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. At this time, the first special symbol or the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120 can be recognized. (Ii) The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed even in the special symbol. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative symbol is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped from the variable display on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, are synchronized.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, and as shown in FIG. 153, the effect display device shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of 1600 (timing K0), the step in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145. In the scheduler update process of S1020, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, what is the first screen data? Because the pointer is updated to instruct whether to output the second screen data to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the production progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. Therefore, while the screen generation schedule data is running and the screen generation schedule data is running, that is, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped. Until this is done, even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145, this connection is established. At the determination of step S1540 in the recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is the value from the start to the stop display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Even when it is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the receiver). Even if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are separated from each other. The process of recovering the connection is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. The message "Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, so the door frame side production receiver tells that the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. While disabling the LOCKN signal from ICSDIC0, displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 106, and all pointer updates are completed. Because it is finished, that is, in the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not started and the screen generation schedule data is not started, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 145 is performed. In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 152 executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the process proceeds to the process of step S1542 in the same process, and the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT. When the value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not occurred even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter CC-CNT is used. When the value of is not 0, that is, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process for communication. When the value of the error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. Occasionally, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, with the transmitter. When an abnormality has definitely occurred in the connection with the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the communication error display process described above is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 It is determined that there is an error in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, that is, there is an error in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the transmitter. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that an error has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT while performing the process of restoring the connection with the receiver. (That is, an abnormality has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by making sure that the communication error display process is performed, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, "upper plate side liquid crystal display device" An error has occurred in the door frame. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the transmission receiver ICSDIC0 on the door frame side is enabled.

In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again. During the interval period until, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, the cumulative number of cases where it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality even once and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has an abnormality. When the number of times does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the transmitter and the receiver When the cumulative number of times that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is determined to be abnormal has reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT (that is,) while the process of recovering the connection between the two is performed. (There is definitely an abnormality in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by making sure to perform the communication error display processing, for example, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, "an error in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device". Has occurred. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified.

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that an abnormality has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "An error has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 Displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are varied again. During the interval period until the display is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled. , Drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d from the start to the stop display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that is abnormal data is invalidated. This is the information that the player is most interested in the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player is given a benefit. Since the player can determine whether or not a big hit game state occurs, when the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the left decorative symbol is displayed. Until the symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, even if the image of the effect drawn in the display area is disturbed due to the influence of noise etc. and cannot be drawn correctly, the effect is displayed on the way. Instead of interrupting and recovering to a state in which drawing can be performed correctly, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, which is of most interest to the player. Some information has been drawn.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the effect display device 1600, or is in a customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used during the period in which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the period in which the effect display device 1600 is demonstrating while waiting for customers. It is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, with the transmitter. It is sent as an operation confirmation request to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the connection with the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f connects the circuits so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that no abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and an abnormality has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450. (For example, "An abnormality has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") Is output to the effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. At the same time, a notification sound (for example, "an abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side") to that effect is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to output the door frame 3 A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided in. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative substrates provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the LOCKN signal output request data is received, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred even if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not occurred, while when the LOCKN signal is not input, it can be determined that no abnormality has occurred. It can be determined that an abnormality has occurred even if an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 131 can be executed as a notification process. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a discovers an abnormality, it can notify the hall clerk or the like by executing the notification process. Therefore, the hall clerk or the like can play a game. It is extremely easy for a person to check whether or not an abnormality has occurred before playing a game, and the check is not troublesome. Therefore, the abnormality can be found without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided on the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication abnormality occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a connection confirmation signal for transmitting a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication abnormalities between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can detect an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communications at an early stage and work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to eliminate the abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the abnormality.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives and outputs the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d does not normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Around the peripheral control unit 1511 which is a production control microprocessor, the LOCKN signal, which is a communication abnormality occurrence signal that conveys that a communication abnormality has occurred between the image communication between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the control MPU 1511a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to convey that a communication abnormality has occurred. The message "An abnormality has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." Is generated, and this generated image can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to notify the user. It has become. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects an abnormality due to a communication abnormality between image communications at an early stage, notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect, and the player is a clerk in the hall or the like. Because it is possible to directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. will resolve the abnormality at an early stage when the abnormality occurs. You can start the work to do. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by detecting and eliminating the abnormality at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 includes the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where an abnormality has occurred even once between the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication abnormality between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the start and stop are displayed and the progress of the game is not executed, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication abnormality is resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where an abnormality has occurred even once between the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication abnormality between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is being repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to fluctuate the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is an abnormality elimination signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication abnormality is eliminated. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1404 or the second special symbol display 1406 while the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not in progress. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect (distortion of the image) that progresses on the display screen is the main control of the main control board 1310. Every time the MPU 1310a starts executing the game again and ends it (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), the MPU 1310a can be directed toward elimination.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 102 and the payout control board 633 of FIG. 124. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 102, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 633 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 580 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 124 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information related to payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 of FIG. 103. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. 125 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, and the operation is performed within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S512 in the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 128 is performed. Then, the RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control MPU952a as the payout control microprocessor as the RAM clear signal for erasing the information about the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and the power-on From time to time, the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed (or the period during which the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 is performed from time of power-on). When the operation is performed after the lapse of time, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 136 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor as an error release signal for canceling the error generated in the payout device 580, and the payout control microprocessor is used. It also has an error canceling function that outputs to a certain payout control MPU952a.

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the process when the main control side power is turned on in FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 110 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination process of step S512 in the process of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 128 is performed from the time of power-on. When operated within the specified period, the RAM clear that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 to the payout control microprocessor MPU952a as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Function and the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 125 is performed from the power-on (or the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 128 from the power-on). When the operation is performed after the elapse of the period), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 115 is not output to the main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error release signal for canceling the error generated in the payout device 580. Since it also has an error canceling function that outputs to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clearing function, can be performed by operating one operation switch 954. It can be provided in 1. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error release function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 3031]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 3031 includes various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001, and a first starting port. It is connected to a sensor 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 (a magnetic detection sensor 4024 described later). Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is given as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit in which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

In a gaming machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a gaming ball driven into the gaming area to manipulate the flowing state of the gaming ball as desired to obtain an unfair profit. There is no end to fraudulent gaming activities.

In order to detect such an illegal game act and suppress the illegal act by a light emitting means, a voice alarm, or the like, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided corresponding to a predetermined position in the game area. There is.

[Conventional magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 155 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit installed in a gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 and a panel relay board 3031. As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is supplied with the voltage + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 is composed of a magnetic sensor MGS and a built-in transistor STR. The magnetic sensor MGS is composed of, for example, a magnetoresistive sensor, and outputs a predetermined voltage (for example, + 5V) when it does not detect magnetism above a predetermined value, and outputs a voltage when it detects magnetism above a predetermined value. It is designed not to (0V).

The base terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the output terminal of the magnetic sensor MGS, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR is grounded. The collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 provided on the panel relay board 3031 via the connector CON1, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. As a result, when the transistor STR is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR0 (corresponding to the first voltage).

When the magnetic sensor MGS does not detect magnetism, the transistor STR is turned on by the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and a current flows from the collector terminal to the ground via the emitter terminal. Further, when the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the transistor STR is turned off by stopping the output from the magnetic sensor MGS, and the current flow from the collector terminal to the emitter terminal is stopped.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to one end of the resistor IR1 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor IR0, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2, and + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2. As a result, when the transistor ITR0 is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the pull-up resistor IR2 and also to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the subsequent stage. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2.

The main control input circuit 1310b is composed of a pull-up resistor NR1, a resistor NR2, and a transistor NTR1. One end of the pull-up resistor NR1 is connected to a collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage of the panel relay board 3031 via a connector CON2. , + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor NR1. As a result, when the transistor ITR1 in the previous stage is in the off state, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to one end of the resistor NR2 in addition to being connected to the pull-up resistor NR1, and the other end of the resistor NR2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor NTR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is electrically connected to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

In the figure, the detection sensor unit corresponds to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the voltage output unit 4163 corresponds to the pull-up resistor IR0 connected to the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and to which + 12V is applied. Further, the detection circuit unit 4164 is a circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied while being connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and a transistor ITR1 in which a base terminal is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0. Applies to.

Further, in the previous stage of the detection circuit unit 4164, the sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of a circuit composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, the resistor IR1 and the transistor ITR0. As described above, the panel relay board 3031 is provided with the sensor signal input unit 4162 and the detection circuit unit 4164.

[Detection operation]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also raised to the + 12V side (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

The operating states of the magnetic sensor MGS, the built-in transistor STR, the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR1, and the transistor NTR1 described above are shown in a table format in FIG. 159. Even when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected from the panel relay board 3031, the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the transistor ITR1 is turned off, and the transistor NTR1 is turned on, as in the operation when the magnetic sensor MGS detects magnetism. ..

By the way, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connecting portion. There are two types of connector members, pin contact type and bellows contact, depending on the shape of the contact part terminal of the connector member. In the case of the bellows contact type, when the harness attached to the connector member is pulled during connection work, pin contact Gap is easier to open than the type. When a gap is opened, dust and the like can easily enter from this portion.

Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls are continuously concentrated and flowed down when playing right-handed, when vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, slight sliding wear occurs. However, this may cause contact resistance.

Here, a conventional magnetic sensor input circuit when such a contact resistance RR occurs in a connector member (connector CON1) that electrically connects the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031. The operation of is described. For example, in FIG. 155, when a contact resistance RR is generated in the connector member, the contact resistance RR is indicated by a chain line. The magnitude of the contact resistance RR is 100 to 1000 times that when the contact of the connector is normal.

As described above, when the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state where magnetism is not detected, the built-in transistor STR is turned on. When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Will be lifted. In FIG. 155, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, so that a voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. .. Then, when the voltage lifted by the contact resistor RR reaches the specified voltage between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, the transistor ITR0 is turned on. Therefore, even though the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state, the transistor ITR0 may be turned on. That is, the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 installed on the panel relay board 3031 may erroneously detect the sensor signal when the contact resistance RR is generated.

[Example 1 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 156 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 1) of the magnetic sensor input circuit installed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the first embodiment in the present embodiment includes the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control board. The main control input circuit 1310b of 1310 has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

The magnetic detection sensor 4024 shall be installed at a plurality of locations in the game area, for example, in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the general winning port 2001, the large winning port 2005, the out port 1126, and the like. become.

The difference between the magnetic sensor input circuit of this embodiment and the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit is that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 does not detect magnetism between the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 (second). In the state), even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the voltage (second voltage) at which the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side. The avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164 is provided, and the voltage output unit 4163 and the detection circuit unit 4164 are electrically connected via the avoidance unit 4166.

In the first embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a Zener diode ZD0 having a Zener voltage higher than the predetermined voltage. Specifically, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the front stage of the connection part. It is connected.

The anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 arranged in the subsequent stage. Further, + 12V is applied to the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 It is connected to the base terminal. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, the Zener voltage is higher than the second voltage, so that the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic sensor MGS is in the detection state where magnetism is detected, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side. Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 via the Zener diode ZD0, a Zener voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (corresponding to the first voltage). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

Then, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that it is in such an abnormal state, in the above example, when it is determined that the logic of the magnetic detection switch signal is HI, the main control unit MPU 1310a is peripheral. An error command is transmitted to the control unit 1511, and a process for outputting a signal to that effect from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer is performed. The peripheral control unit 1511 notifies the abnormality by the effect display device 1600, the alarm lamp, the voice, or the like in response to the error command.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the non-detection state (second state) in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to be built-in. The transistor STR turns on.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 104, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the Zener diode ZD0 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the Zener It will be applied to the cathode terminal of the diode ZD0. Even if a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied, the Zener diode ZD0 maintains the non-conducting state because the Zener voltage is higher than the predetermined voltage. Therefore, no voltage is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 (0V). As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

As in the conventional case, when an abnormality is detected by the magnetic sensor MGS, the main control MPU 1310a sends an error command to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 responds to the transmitted error command with a magnet. The game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect display device, the warning display, the voice, etc. are notified that an illegal game act using the above is performed or that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is disconnected. .. Further, an error signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer.

[Example 2 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 157 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 2) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the second embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, the detection circuit unit 4164, and the main control of the main control board 1310. The input circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 has a first resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the voltage output unit 4163 and a second resistor IR1 whose one end is connected to the other end of the first resistor IR1 and whose other end is grounded. It is configured to include the resistance IR3 of. Comparing the sensor signal input unit 4162 of the second embodiment with the conventional sensor signal input unit 4162 of FIG. 155, one end of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded is arranged after the other end of the resistor IR1. It differs in that it is connected to the connection point of the transistor ITR0 with the base terminal. That is, in the second embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR3 that causes a current to flow to the ground and drops it when the predetermined voltage is applied.

One end of the first resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and is connected to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 via the connector CON1 in the previous stage of the connection portion. ing.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR1 to which + 12V is applied to the other end in the detection circuit unit 4164, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1 is grounded, and the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is connected to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the connector CON2. The sensor signal input unit 4162 is composed of the connector CON1, the voltage output unit 4163, and the avoidance unit 4166.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR.

As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). Further, since the collector terminal of the transistor STR is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0, the voltage lowered to the ground side is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to the series resistance circuit composed of the pull-up resistor IR0, the first resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, and the second resistor IR3, and the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor of the avoidance section 4166 are applied. A current flows to the ground via IR1 and the second resistor IR3. When a current flows through the second resistor IR3, a potential difference generated between both ends of the second resistor IR3 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, so that the transistor ITR0 is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0. Further, when the transistor ITR0 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 157, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the first resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, when a current flows through the contact resistor RR generated due to the contact state of the connector portion, a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is added to the second voltage, and the second voltage is added. It will be applied to one end of the resistor of 1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage is added and applied to one end of the first resistor, a current flows through the first resistor IR1 and further this current flows to the ground through the second resistor IR3. That is, since the other end of the second resistor IR3 is grounded, the current due to the voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage is almost grounded. When it falls, almost no current flows into the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage of the second resistor IR3. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage is not turned on. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the subsequent stage remains off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

[Example 3 of magnetic sensor input circuit]
FIG. 158 is a circuit diagram showing an example (Example 3) of the magnetic sensor input circuit deployed in the gaming machine of the embodiment. The magnetic sensor input circuit of the third embodiment is the magnetic detection sensor 4024 of the conventional magnetic sensor input circuit of FIG. 155, a connector, a voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031, a detection circuit unit 4164, and a main control input of the main control board 1310. The circuit 1310b has the same circuit configuration. Therefore, the same reference numerals are used for the same circuit components.

In the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is a resistor with two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting a Darlington circuit set to an operating voltage higher than a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage. It is configured to include IR1, IR4, and IR5. Compared with the above-described second embodiment, in the third embodiment, the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5 connected in series instead of the resistor IR3 whose other end is grounded are connected in parallel to the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 constituting the Darlington circuit, respectively. You are connected. That is, in the third embodiment, the avoidance unit 4166 is an example composed of a resistor IR4 and a resistor IR5 that cause a current to flow to the ground and drop when the predetermined voltage is applied.

More specifically, one end of the resistor IR1 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage of the Darlington circuit. The emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage of the Darlington circuit, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 is grounded.

Further, the other end of the resistor IR1 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and is also connected to one end of the resistor IR4, and the other end of the resistor IR4 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. Further, one end of the resistor IR5 is connected to the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage, and the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded.

That is, the resistor IR4 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the first stage, and the resistor IR5 is connected in parallel between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the second stage. Further, the collector terminals of the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 are set at one end of the pull-up resistor IR2 in which + 12V of the detection circuit unit 4164 is applied to the other end, and are connected to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1.

[Detection operation when connector contact is normal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR. When the transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the connector CON1, the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. Further, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage). By connecting the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 to the collector terminal of the transistor STR, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 is also lowered to the ground side. As a result, the transistor ITR0 is turned off, and the transistor ITR2 is also turned off.

When the transistor ITR0 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor IR2 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164, so that the transistor ITR1 is turned on. When the transistor ITR1 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor NR1, the connector CON2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR1.

Further, when the transistor ITR1 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR1 is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor NTR1 is turned off. The magnetic detection switch signal in which the logic of the collector terminal in which the transistor NTR1 is turned off is LOW (off) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

When the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in the detection state of detecting magnetism, the output of the voltage from the magnetic sensor MGS is stopped, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR disappears, so that the built-in transistor STR is turned off. When the transistor STR is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is raised to the + 12V side.

Further, a voltage of + 12V is applied to a series resistance circuit composed of a pull-up resistor IR0, a resistor IR1 of the avoidance section 4166, a resistor IR4, and a resistor IR5. A current flows to the ground via IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR4, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR4 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage. As a result, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on.

When the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0, the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR0, and the resistor IR5. When a current flows through the resistor IR5, a potential difference generated between both ends of the resistor IR5 is applied between the base terminal and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on.

When the latter transistor ITR2 is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR2, the collector terminal of the latter transistor ITR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor ITR2. Further, when the transistor ITR2 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground side, and the transistor ITR1 is turned off.

When the transistor ITR1 is turned off, the voltage pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor NR1 of the main control input circuit 1310b is applied to the base terminal of the transistor NTR1 to turn on the transistor NTR1. When the transistor NTR1 is turned on, the magnetic detection switch signal whose logic connected to the collector terminal of the transistor NTR1 is HI (on) is input to the input port of the main control MPU1310a.

[Detection operation when connector contact is abnormal]
When the magnetic sensor MGS of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is in a non-detection state in which magnetism is not detected, the voltage output from the magnetic sensor MGS is applied to the base terminal of the built-in transistor STR to turn on the built-in transistor STR.

When the built-in transistor STR is turned on, a current flows to the ground via the pull-up resistor IR0, the contact resistor RR (connector CON1), the collector terminal of the transistor STR, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the built-in transistor STR is lowered to the ground side (corresponding to the second voltage), but the current flows through the contact resistor RR, so that the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR Is lifted. In FIG. 158, the connection point between the pull-up resistor IR0 and the resistor IR1 is illustrated as a black circle as a place where the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor RR rises.

That is, a voltage obtained by adding a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage to the second voltage by flowing a current through the contact resistance generated due to the contact state of the connector portion. Will be applied to one end of the resistor IR1. This voltage is sufficiently lower than the voltage applied when the built-in transistor of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned off.

When a predetermined voltage higher than the second voltage and lower than the first voltage is applied to one end of the resistor IR1, a current flows through the resistor IR1 and further, this current flows to the ground through the resistor IR4 and the resistor IR5. That is, since the other end of the resistor IR5 is grounded, most of the current due to the applied predetermined voltage falls to the ground, and most of the current is applied to the base terminal of the transistor ITR0 in the front stage of the Darlington circuit, which is the rear stage of the resistance IR1. It does not flow. Therefore, the transistor ITR0 in the previous stage is not turned on. Also, the transistor ITR2 in the subsequent stage does not turn on. As a result, the two transistors ITR0 and ITR2 of the Darlington circuit remain off. That is, the avoidance unit 4166 avoids the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164.

The operation of the detection circuit unit 4164 and the main control input circuit 1310b in the subsequent stage is the same as the detection operation when the contact of the connector is normal.

As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so when contact resistance occurs due to slight sliding wear of the connector member, etc., the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance False positives can be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIG. 160, a plurality of open collector type sensor signal input units 4162 connected to each of the plurality of magnetic detection sensors 4024 are connected in parallel to the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164. ing. When any one of these sensor signal input units 4162 detects magnetism and turns on, the transistor ITR1 of the detection circuit unit 4164 turns off.

Similarly, when any one of the connections between the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the sensor signal input unit 4162 is broken, the sensor signal input unit 4162 corresponding to the broken magnetic detection sensor 4024 is turned on to detect the detection circuit unit 4164. Transistor ITR1 is turned off. When there are a plurality of sensors, a voltage output unit 4163 is provided for each of the plurality of sensors, and the voltage output unit 4163 provided for each is provided with a transistor array having a plurality of Darlington circuits, for example, "TD62083AP" (commercially available product, TOSHIBA). Can be used by connecting to (manufactured).

Although the sensor signal input unit 4162 deployed on the panel relay board 3031 of the present embodiment has been described above, the detection sensor applicable to the sensor signal input unit 4162 is not limited to the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the connector member. It suffices as long as the sensor signal is transmitted from the detection sensor by means of various sensors, for example, general winning opening sensor 4020, first starting port sensor 4002, second starting port sensor 4004, count sensor 4005, vibration detection sensor, contact. It is possible to apply a sensor or the like.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to Examples 1 to 3. However, unless the gist of the present invention, that is, the circuit configuration provided with the avoidance unit 4166 is changed, the voltage output unit 4163, The arrangement locations on the substrate for the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 can be variously selectively changed and arranged as needed. Below, some variations of the arrangement example are shown.

[Example 4]
FIG. 161 shows an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031. The basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 161, the collector terminal of the transistor ITR0 for signal relay of the panel relay board 3031, the other end of the pull-up resistor IR2 of the detection circuit unit 4164 of the main control board 1310, and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1 are connected to the connector CON2. It is electrically connected by.

[Example 5]
FIG. 162 shows another example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit is arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example, the voltage output unit 4163 and the avoidance unit 4166 are arranged on the panel relay board 3031, and the signal relay transistor ITR0 is provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. There is. Also in this Example 5, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 162, the anode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 constituting the avoidance portion 4166 of the panel relay board 3031 and the base terminal of the signal relay transistor ITR0 of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected by the connector CON2. It is connected.

Further, in the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 161 and the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 162, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses having connector members at both ends (in FIG. 157, they are simply referred to as CON2). ) Is electrically connected. Therefore, contact resistance may occur even at the connector connection portion. Therefore, in order to avoid erroneous detection of the signal due to this contact resistance, as a modification of the fourth embodiment, in addition to the bull-up resistor NR1 in which + 12V is applied to the latter stage of the connector member CON2 on the circuit, that is, to one end. Similar to the avoidance section 4166, another avoidance section may be provided between the connection point between the end and the signal line connected to the connector member CON2 and the base terminal of the transistor ITR1. According to this, false detection of a signal can be further reduced, and the reliability of signal detection is improved.

In the present invention, an example in which the detection circuit unit 4164 is composed of the pull-up resistor IR2 and the transistor ITR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end in Examples 4 and 5 will be described. In essence, this selects the one that is advantageous in terms of control due to the difference in the logic (whether the HI level is active or the LOW level is active) input to the main control MPU 1310a connected to the subsequent stage. For this purpose, a circuit including a pull-up resistor IR2 and a transistor ITR1 is provided as a detection circuit unit 4164, and this is arranged in front of the main control input circuit 1310a.

However, the other end of the bullup resistor NR1 to which + 12V is applied to one end is connected to the signal line, the base terminal is connected to the subsequent stage of the signal line via the resistor NR2, and the emitter terminal is grounded. The main control input circuit 1310a itself, in which the collector terminal is connected to the input port (not shown), substitutes for the detection circuit unit 4164 (in other words, the circuit that functions as the detection circuit unit 4164, that is, the main circuit. (Because it is possible to perform detection with the control input circuit 1310a), however, the present invention is fully valid.

[Example 6]
FIG. 163 shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4166 and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. The signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in this Example 6, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 163, the signal line leading to the connector CON1 to which the other end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163 of the panel relay board 3031 is connected and the avoidance unit 4166 of the main control board 1310 are configured. The cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 is electrically connected by the connector CON2.

When the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are configured as circuits as in the above-mentioned Examples 4 to 6, the panel relay board 3031 is a detection sensor unit (in this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is used. There is an advantage that it can be shared regardless of the type (not limited to).

From the standpoint of ease of assembly, it is desirable to use a relay board, but the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 provided at the start port that brings a lottery to the player are convenient. Even if it is missing, it may be better to connect it directly to the main control board 1310 with a connector without providing a circuit element on the relay board from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. In such a case, the configuration of Example 7 works well.

[Example 7]
FIG. 164 shows an example in which the voltage output unit 4163, the avoidance unit 4166, and the detection circuit unit 4164 of the magnetic sensor input circuit are arranged on the main control board 1310. In this example as well, the signal relay transistor ITR0 is also provided in front of the detection circuit unit 4164 by moving the arrangement location to the main control board 1310. Also in this Example 7, the basic electrical connection is the same as the circuit shown in FIG. 156. Further, the action and effect of the avoidance unit 4166 are the same as those of the circuit shown in FIG. 156.

As shown in FIG. 164, the panel relay board 3031 is simply formed with a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays the signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024. The signal line is electrically connected to the connector CON1 of the main control board 1310 by a harness connected to the connector on the panel relay board 3031. That is, the cathode terminal of the Zener diode ZD0 of the main control board 1310 is connected to one end of the pull-up resistor IR0 of the voltage output unit 4163, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is built in in front of the connection part via the connector CON1 and the panel relay board 3031. It is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR of.

Although the relay board provided with only the connectors (CON3, CON4) is used in FIG. 164, the output of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is directly connected to the main control board 1310 without using the relay board. You can also.

Even with the configurations shown in [Example 4] to [Example 7], since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected (because there is no voltage change), so that the connector member When a contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear or the like, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance.

In the seventh embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 through the connector CON3 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the panel relay board 3031, and further, the panel relay board 3031 is further connected. It is configured to be electrically connected to the connector member CON1 provided on the main control board 1310 through the connector CON4 (represented by a square in the drawing) provided on the main control board 1310. Therefore, contact resistance may occur at three locations, the connector CON3, the connector CON4, and the connector CON1.

In consideration of this, the voltage due to the current flowing through the contact resistance generated by the looseness of the connection portion (CON3 and CON4 represented by the square in the figure) of the panel relay board 3031 and the contact resistance RR of the connector CON1 portion. Even if the detection sensor unit (magnetic detection sensor 4024) is added to the second voltage in the second state, the avoidance unit (the amount of voltage added due to the contact resistance generated at each of the above three connector connection parts) The 4166 is selected and provided so as to avoid the action of the predetermined voltage on the detection circuit unit 4164. As a result, the voltage of the detection circuit unit 4164 is not affected, so that when contact resistance is generated due to slight sliding wear of each connector member, erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance is prevented. Can be done.

Further, in the configurations shown in [Example 4] to [Example 7], the Zener diode ZD0 is used as the avoidance unit 4166, but the avoidance unit 4166 is not limited to the Zener diode ZD0 and has been described above. The avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 157 (Example 2) and the avoidance unit 4166 of FIG. 158 (Example 3) can be used.

Since the panel relay board 3031 shown in the seventh embodiment has only a signal line (for example, by printed wiring) that simply relays the signal from the detection sensor unit, signals from the plurality of detection sensor units can be generated. There is an advantage that the panel relay board 3031 is integrated independently, the printed wiring is formed so as to be integrated into one connector member, and the main control board 1310 is connected to the connector.

[Electrical connection of detection sensor, panel relay board and main control board]
Next, the electrical connection of the detection sensor unit 4000, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing a basic configuration of an electrical connection between a detection sensor unit, a panel relay board, and a main control board. The detection sensor unit 4000 is a general term for various detection sensors arranged at predetermined positions on the game board 5, and as described above, for example, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the second The starting port sensor 2402, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (reference numeral 3003 in FIG. 102) and the like correspond to each other.

The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game, and is a board on which the main control MPU 1310, which is the main control body, is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 is a board that relays the detection signal of the detection sensor unit 4000 to the main control board 1310.

The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via the connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. It is electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

[Arrangement positions of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine]
FIG. 166 is a front view schematically showing each example of the arrangement position of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in the pachinko machine 1. In FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D), the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are rear portions of the game board 5 which are not visible to the player, and are basically an effect display device (for example,). , Liquid crystal display device) 1600 (see FIG. 100, not shown in the figure). Reference numeral 180 is a handle unit provided on the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like and operated by the player, and reference numeral 303 is provided in the lower center of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 9 and the like. It is a pressing operation unit that is pushed in for the production by the player.

In FIG. 166 (A), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is located on the right side of the main control board 1310 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown. In addition, in FIGS. 166 (A) to 165 (D), specifically, a box attached to the rear surface of a plate-shaped transparent game panel 1100 (see FIGS. 100 and 101) that partitions the rear end of the game area 5a. The panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000.

In FIG. 166 (B), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 is located on the right side of the panel relay board 3031 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown. In FIG. 166 (C), the main control board 1310 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5, and the panel relay board 3031 is located on the left side of the main control board 1310 in the lower part of the rear part of the game board 5. The arrangement pattern that is arranged is shown.

Further, in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (C), the positional relationship of the panel relay board 3031 with respect to the main control board 1310 in the front-rear direction is the same layer as the main control board 1310 or the panel relay board in front of the main control board 1310. 3031 is located.

Further, FIG. 166 (D) shows an arrangement pattern in which the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are overlapped and arranged in the front-rear direction in the center of the lower part of the rear portion of the game board 5. In FIG. 166 (D), the panel relay board 3031 is arranged in front of the main control board 1310. As shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) shown above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 is determined from various conditions.

The detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the panel relay board 3031 via the connector member 4501 provided on the panel relay board 3031. Further, the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 are harnesses in which the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310 are provided with connectors for connection at both ends. It is electrically connected by being connected by a connector. That is, the detection sensor unit 4000 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the connector member 4501 and the connector member 4502 included in the panel relay board 3031 and the connector member 4503 included in the main control board, and the detection sensor unit 4000 is detected. The signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, the examples described below are made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is not only to provide an avoidance unit unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, but also to provide an avoidance unit. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the arrangement positional relationship between the vibration source and the control board.

[Example of arrangement of avoidance unit]
167 (A) to 167 (C) are views showing an example of arrangement of the avoidance unit 4510 with respect to the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. The avoidance unit 4510 shows a circuit configuration including an avoidance unit 4166 for avoiding the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. The avoidance section 4166 has been described above in FIGS. 156 to 158, and in the circuit portion arranged in front of the avoidance section 4166, the connection state of the connector member is loosened, and contact resistance is generated in this portion. By doing so, even if the voltage is added by the contact resistance, the action of the added voltage on the detection circuit unit arranged after the avoidance unit 4166 is avoided.

As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, there is an increased risk that the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000 will be erroneously detected due to the contact resistance of the connector member. However, as shown in FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (D) described above, the arrangement of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 is usually determined from various conditions. At that time, it is often the case that consideration is not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, the vibrating source that affects the vibration is caused by the collision between the game ball guide path member arranged in the right side area of the game area 5a by right-handed taxiing and the game ball, for example, an effect button (operation button). This includes the taxiing operation of the ball launcher, the ball striking motion of the ball launching device, and the sound produced by the high-power speaker.

Therefore, the embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and a contact resistance is generated due to loosening of the connector member, and an avoidance unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. In addition to providing the unit 4510, the avoidance unit 4510 is appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration generation source.

FIG. 167 (A) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the panel relay board 3031. The connector is connected by applying vibration to the connector member 4501 that electrically connects the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 3031. Even if the member 4501 loosens and a contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. Is.

FIG. 167 (B) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on the main control board 1310, and vibration is generated in the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310. When the connector member 4502 or 4503 is loosened due to the addition, even if contact resistance is generated due to this loosening, the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance is avoided by the avoidance unit 4510, so that the connector member 4502 or 4503 is relayed from the panel relay board 3031. This is to avoid erroneous detection of the output signal.

FIG. 167 (C) shows an example in which the avoidance unit 4510 is provided on both the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310, respectively, and a connector for electrically connecting the detection sensor unit 4000 and the panel relay board 3031. Vibration is applied to the member 4501 and vibration is applied to the connector member 4502 provided on the panel relay board 3031 or the connector member 4503 provided on the main control board 1310, whereby the connector member 4501, the connector member 4502 or the connector is applied. Even if the member 4503 loosens and a contact resistance is generated due to the loosening, the avoidance unit 4510 avoids the voltage addition action due to the contact resistance, thereby avoiding erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor unit 4000. Moreover, the false detection of the signal relayed and output from the panel relay board 3031 is avoided.

[Specific example of vibration source and arrangement example of avoidance unit 4510]
FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (F) are diagrams showing a specific example of the vibration generation source in the pachinko machine 1 and an arrangement example of the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310. In each figure, a member that is a vibration source is shown by a hatched portion. FIGS. 168 (A) to 168 (C) show a game in which a large number of right-handed game balls continuously and flow down in the right-hand area of the game area 5a when the game is taxied right-handed. An example is shown in which the ball guide path unit 4200 is provided, and when slight sliding wear occurs due to vibration from the game ball guide path unit 4200 applied to the connector member, contact resistance may be generated due to this. There is.

In the case of the board-arranged gaming machine shown in FIG. 168 (A), when the vibration source is a collision between the gaming board 5 and the gaming ball by right-handed striking, the panel with respect to the gaming ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Since the relay boards 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4501 shown in FIG. 167 (A)] of the panel relay board 3031 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

In the case of the board-arranged gaming machine shown in FIG. 168 (B), when the vibration source is a collision between the gaming board 5 and the gaming ball due to a right-handed strike, the vibration source is mainly the gaming ball guide path unit 4200. Since the control boards 1310 are arranged close to each other, the connector member [connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167 (B)] of the main control board 1310 is easily affected. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

In the case of the game machine with the board arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (C), when the vibration source is a collision between the game board 5 and the game ball by right-handed striking, the main is the game ball guide path unit 4200 which is the vibration source. Considering that the control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 are arranged close to each other, the connector members [connector member 4501, connector member 4502, and connector member 4503 shown in FIG. 167 (C)] of both boards vibrate. Susceptible to. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on both the main control board 1310 and the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (C)].

FIG. 168 (D) shows a case where the vibration source is the pressing operation unit 303. For example, when the player concentrates on the game and strikes the pressing operation unit 303 with force, or at the time of a specific effect, the effect display device 1600 displays a message of "continuous hit", and the player recognizes the message. As a result, when the vibration source is an operation on the pressing operation unit 303 for production, such as when the player continuously hits the pressing operation unit 303, the pressing operation unit 303 becomes the vibration generation source. A case is assumed. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168 (D), since the main control board 1310 is arranged close to the pressing operation unit 303 which is the vibration generation source, the connector member of the main control board 1310 [FIG. 167]. The connector member 4503 shown in (B)] is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the main control board 1310 [see FIG. 167 (B)].

Not only in the case of the gaming machine having the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (D), but also in the case of the gaming machine having the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D), FIGS. 167 (A) to 167. The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 168 (E) shows a case where the vibration source is a ball hammer 543 of the ball launcher 540 (see FIG. 10 for a specific arrangement position). For example, in a right-handed game, it is assumed that the striking force (elastic force) of the ball launching device 540 with respect to the game ball launched by the hammer 543 becomes large, and the impact at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168 (E), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the hitting mallet 543 which is the vibration generation source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. 167 (FIG. 167). The connector member 4501] shown in A) is susceptible to vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

Not only in the case of the gaming machine having the substrate arrangement shown in FIG. 168 (E), but also in the case of the gaming machine having the substrate arrangement shown in FIGS. 168 (B) to 168 (D), FIG. 167 (A) -The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIG. 167 (C) can be adopted.

FIG. 168 (F) shows a case where the vibration source is the main body frame speaker 622 for sound output (see FIG. 79 for a specific arrangement position). For example, a loud sound effect is output from the main body frame speaker 622 in order to excite the game state at the time of a specific effect, and it is assumed that the vibration of the main body frame speaker 622 at this time becomes a vibration generation source. In contrast to such a case, in FIG. 168 (F), since the panel relay board 3031 is arranged close to the main body frame speaker 622 which is the vibration source, the connector member of the panel relay board 3031 [FIG. 167]. The connector member 4501 shown in (A)] is easily affected by vibration. Therefore, the avoidance unit 4510 is arranged on the panel relay board 3031 [see FIG. 167 (A)].

Not only in the case of the board-arranged gaming machine shown in FIG. 168 (F), but also in the case of the substrate-arranged gaming machine shown in FIGS. 168 (A), 168 (B) and 168 (D). , The arrangement pattern of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be adopted.

The member serving as the vibration source shown above is not limited to one in the pachinko machine 1. For example, a member provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a taxiing mallet 543, a member provided with a game ball guide path unit 4200 and a pressing operation unit 303, and the like, which are sources of vibration depending on the game state. Is also expected to change. That is, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of members serving as vibration sources is assumed. Even in that case, any of the arrangement patterns of the avoidance unit 4510 shown in FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (C) can be adopted.

As described above, the avoidance unit 4510 can be appropriately arranged on the panel relay board 3031 and the main control board 1310 in consideration of the positional relationship with the vibration source. Further, by appropriately arranging the avoidance unit 4510, even if the connector member is loosened due to the vibration from the member that is the vibration source, and the contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to the contact resistance is generated. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of signals from 4000 and the panel relay board 3031.

As described above, when signal transmission is performed by the connector member, contact resistance is generated when the connector member is corroded or dust enters the connector connection portion. Further, when vibration is applied to the connector member, contact resistance is similarly generated. For example, when a large number of game balls continuously concentrate and flow down when a vibration from a specific part of the game area is applied to the connector member, such as when playing right-handed, contact resistance is generated by this. There is a risk.

When a current flows through the contact resistor generated due to such a situation, the potential on the upstream side of the contact resistor rises, and there is a risk that an abnormal voltage different from the original normal state may enter the detection circuit section. is there. That is, there is a risk of erroneously detecting the signal of the detection sensor.

Therefore, it is necessary to prevent erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor due to the contact resistance. As described above, when vibration is applied to the connector member, the risk of erroneous detection of the signal from the detection sensor increases. However, usually, the arrangement of the panel relay board and the main control board on the game board is determined from various conditions. At that time, it is often the case that consideration is not given to arranging each substrate so as to avoid being affected by vibration. On the other hand, the vibrating sources that affect it include the above-mentioned collision between the game board and the game ball by right-handed striking, for example, the striking operation of the effect button, the striking motion of the ball-launching mallet, and the high. The loud volume by the output speaker can be mentioned.

Therefore, the examples described below have been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is not only to provide an avoidance unit unit for avoiding erroneous detection of a signal from a detection sensor due to contact resistance, but also to provide an avoidance unit. The present invention relates to a gaming machine in which an avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on a panel relay board or a main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with a vibration source.

The embodiments described above can be summarized as the following technical means.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
A detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. And in order to solve the above problem,
In the area on the right side of the game area where the game ball is hit, a game ball guide path unit is arranged in which the game ball that is hit to the right continuously flows down when the game ball is hit to the right.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
The board having the connector member is arranged close to the game ball guide path unit, and the contact resistance generated in the connector member on either the main control board or the panel relay board is used. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage addition action.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 1], the avoidance unit is suitable for either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the game ball guide path unit which is the vibration source. Can be placed in. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [means 2] relays a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In a gaming machine equipped with a panel relay board
It has an operation button that allows the player to perform a predetermined operation for production.
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the operation button, and a voltage is added to either the main control board or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance generated in the connector member. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the action,
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 2], the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship with the operation button that is the vibration source. be able to. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 3] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In the machine
It has a ball launching device that launches a game ball into the game area in response to an operation on the hitting handle, and at least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A substrate having the connector member is arranged close to the hammer of the ball launcher, and a contact resistance generated in the connector member is generated on either one of the main control board and the panel relay board. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid the voltage addition action due to.
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 3], the avoidance unit is placed on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship between the ball launcher, which is the source of vibration, and the hammer. Can be placed properly. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

The gaming machine according to [Means 4] is
A game provided with a detection sensor unit arranged at a predetermined position on the game board, a main control board for controlling the progress of the game, and a panel relay board for relaying the detection signal of the detection sensor unit to the main control board. In the machine
Has a speaker for sound output,
At least one of the main control board and the panel relay board has a connector member.
A board having the connector member is arranged close to the speaker, and a voltage addition action due to a contact resistance generated in the connector member is applied to either the main control board or the panel relay board. An avoidance unit is provided to avoid
It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to [Means 4], when it becomes a vibration source, the avoidance unit is appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the high output speaker. can do. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

According to the gaming machine of each of the above embodiments, the avoidance unit can be appropriately arranged on either the panel relay board or the main control board in consideration of the positional relationship of the gaming members that are the vibration generation sources. it can. In addition, by properly arranging the avoidance unit, the connector member may loosen due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even if contact resistance is generated due to this, the detection sensor unit due to contact resistance or It is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the signal from the panel relay board.

Not limited to the above-mentioned circumstances, in recent gaming machines, it is common to provide a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) that are electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or solenoid used for production. .. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories are increasing, and the operating range and, depending on the object, the operating speed are also increasing, and the moving method is also complicated. Therefore, it is conceivable that the movable accessory itself becomes a vibration source, and the connector member becomes loose, which causes contact resistance. Even in such a case, the embodiment of the present invention can avoid erroneous detection of a signal from the detection sensor unit or the panel relay board due to the contact resistance.

By the way, if a plurality of movable accessories are not in the initial positions, there is a risk that a predetermined effect cannot be started normally.

Therefore, in order to surely grasp the initial position of the movable effect body, the origin position detection sensor (a photo sensor that is a set of a floodlight type and a light receiving type is often used) is directly built in the movable effect body or the drive motor. In the mold, these detection signals are fed back to the control body and used for control. The exchange of electrical signals between the control board for production and the drive board is also realized by the connector members and the harness connecting them.

Since many concrete illustrations have already been made, the illustrations are omitted, but the arrangement positions of the movable effectable objects on the game board surface are, for example, behind the upper part of the game area 5a (initial position) and behind the left side of the game area 5a. (Initial position), the effect movable body divided into left and right in the central part of the game area 5a is united in the central part of the game panel, or the initial position in the lower center of the game area 5a (rear of the big winning opening unit, etc.) Depending on the model and version, such as when something moves upward, the placement position changes in various ways to appeal the characteristics of the gaming machine.

By the way, if it becomes impossible to correctly transmit and receive the drive data and each signal for operating it and the origin detection signal, it is assumed that not only error detection may not be possible but also error transmission may occur. .. Here, it is considered that the avoidance unit 4166 described above is provided on the drive board in the subsequent stage in the transmission direction of the origin position detection sensor, or is provided on the signal input side of the peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 102) on the control side. To.

As described above, even when the effect of rapidly coalescing at least two movable members is performed, it is expected that the vibration due to the collision at that time will be violently transmitted, and in this case as well, it is necessary to take appropriate measures. As a specific example, as shown in FIG. 169 (C), when the intense heat effect in which the left and right movable members shown by hatching are united at the central portion of the game board 5 is performed, the arrangement position of the peripheral control board and the left and right are arranged. It is necessary to consider the location of the sensor that detects the origin position of the movable body.

[Electrical connection of origin position detection sensor, drive board and peripheral control board that controls it]
FIG. 169 (A) shows a basic configuration mainly of electrical connection of a peripheral control board 1510, a panel relay board 3031 (drive board), a drive means, and an origin position detection sensor 4000 for detecting the origin position of a movable effect body. It is a block diagram which shows.

The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect, and is a board on which the peripheral control unit 1511 which is the main body of the effect control is mounted. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is also a board that relays the detection signal of the origin position detection sensor unit 4000 to the peripheral control board 1510.

In FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 mainly controls the effect, and the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) outputs the drive data output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the drive source and at least the movable effect body. The information of the initial position (origin position detection sensor) of the above is input and the input information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used for control based on this. The panel relay board 3031 (drive board) is for supplying a drive current according to a drive signal to the drive means, and is also an origin for detecting an initial position for supplying a drive current according to a movable effect body. The position detection is passed to the panel relay board 3031 (drive board). As shown in FIG. 169 (A), the transmission and reception of these control signals are performed by electrical connection by the connector members 4504, 4505, 4506.

Since there are various positional relationships between the movable member for producing the vibration source and the connector member connecting the peripheral control board 1510 or the panel relay board 3031 (drive board) and the origin position inspection sensor, one of them is ". The avoidance unit 4150 is arranged in consideration of the appropriate influence of whether the connector connection is loosened due to vibration. It can be appropriately arranged as shown in FIG. 169 (A) or FIG. 169 (B). As a result, the connector member is loosened due to vibration from the member that is the source of vibration, and even when contact resistance is generated by these, the origin position detection sensor 4000 due to the contact resistance and the signal from the drive board are erroneously used. It is possible to avoid detection.

When operating the movable accessory, the looseness of the connector connection between the drive means, the origin position detection sensor, the drive board, and the peripheral control board, which are connected by the connector, was regarded as a problem. , Ball launcher, speaker is also applied when considered as a vibration source.

[Grouping of movable accessories for multiple productions]
As described above, in a gaming machine, it is common that a plurality of movable effectors (movable accessories) electrically driven by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid used for the effect are provided. The volume and operating range of these movable accessories are increasing, and the operating range and, depending on the object, the operating speed are also increasing, and the moving method is also complicated. Furthermore, the movable ranges of different movable accessories may intersect.

If, for example, an abnormality occurs in one of the plurality of movable accessories that the initial position at which the operation starts when the production is started is not returned, the operating states of the other movable accessories are mostly considered. The current situation is that it has not. If the return operation is performed only by the movable accessory in which the abnormality has occurred without considering the other movable accessory, there is a risk of interfering with the other movable accessory. In that case, there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and the interest of the game may be reduced.

Here, in order to use the movable accessory for the production, it is necessary to restore all the movable accessory to the initial position. In addition, when the accessory is unintentionally stopped at a place other than the initial position for some reason, the movable accessory is restored to the initial position, but when a plurality of accessories are not in the initial position, the above-mentioned If you do not consider that the movable ranges of the movable accessories intersect with each other as in the above, when performing the restoration operation, all the movable accessories will be restored to the initial position by physically interfering with other movable accessories. You may not be able to do it. In such a case, a large vibration or the like different from the usual one may occur due to the physical interference of the movable accessory. However, since the avoidance unit 4166 is provided as described above, the peripheral control is performed. On the substrate 1510, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection of the detection signal of the sensor.

Therefore, in the embodiment described below, in order to reliably restore the plurality of accessories to the initial positions, the movable accessories whose operating ranges physically interfere with each other are collectively managed as one group. , The movable accessories in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the respective initial positions where each movable accessory starts the operation for starting the production. By performing the return operation in a predetermined operation sequence as described above, recovery from a place other than the initial position is surely performed.

In the following embodiments, each of the plurality of movable accessories is movable within the operating range from the initial position at which the operation for the effect is started to the operation position until the operation for the effect is completed. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each of the plurality of movable accessories is divided into a plurality of groups in which the operating ranges of the movable accessories do not interfere with each other, and in at least one group, the operating ranges of the movable accessories are mutually exclusive. It contains multiple movable accessories that interfere with each other.

Further, the plurality of movable accessories are provided with an initial position detection sensor (for example, a photo sensor) that detects at least an initial position set in advance for each of the movable objects. In addition to the initial position detection sensor that can detect the operation start position for the effect, the position detection sensor may be provided with a position detection sensor that detects the intermediate position of the operation range or the end point position of the operation range. Good. The peripheral control board 1510 has a predetermined position (initial position, intermediate position, or end point position) as described above even for one of a plurality of movable accessories in a group including a plurality of movable accessories whose operating ranges interfere with each other. When there is an abnormality in which is not detected, the movable accessories do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position where each movable accessory becomes the start position of the operation for starting the effect. All the movable accessories in the group are restored to their initial positions according to the predetermined operation sequence.

FIG. 170 is a front view conceptually showing, for example, a plurality of movable accessories for effect arranged in the back effect unit 3100 and grouping of the plurality of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 170, the accessory group 01 (reference numeral 5000) is arranged in the central portion of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory group 02 (reference numeral 5002) is arranged in the right side portion of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory group 03 (reference numeral 5004) is arranged on the left side of the machine 1, and the accessory group 04 (reference numeral 5006) is arranged at the substantially center of the upper part of the pachinko machine 1, and at the lower part of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory group 05 (reference numeral 5008) is arranged. That is, the pachinko machine 1 has five accessory groups.

The five accessory groups 01 to 05 are designed so as not to physically interfere with each other within the operating range. More specifically, the accessory group 01 is composed of a mask accessory, a fuselage deformed left accessory, a fuselage deformed right accessory, a fuselage storage-appearing accessory, an upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and a lower liquid crystal driving accessory. There is. The character group 02 is composed of only the right shoulder character, the character group 03 is composed of only the left shoulder character, the character group 04 is composed of only the face character, and the character group 05 is composed of only the pop-up character. Has been done.

Therefore, the movable accessories whose operating ranges for production physically interfere with each other are grouped in the same group. In the above example, the masked accessory belonging to the accessory group 01, the fuselage deformed left accessory, the fuselage deformed right accessory, the fuselage storage-appearing accessory, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and the lower liquid crystal driving accessory have operating ranges of each other. Are supposed to interfere with each other.

[Recovery operation of movable accessory to initial position (referred to as accessory correction operation)]
If even one of the movable accessories in the accessory group is abnormal, all the movable accessories in the accessory group are operated in a predetermined operation sequence to restore the initial position. For example, when the state changes or when the change starts, check the state of the photos of all the motors, and if there is a problem (for example, when it is detected that it is not in the initial position), the accessory group to which the motor belongs The accessory is restored to the correct position by using the motor sequence data that performs the correction operation for all the accessory.

In this embodiment, with respect to the character group 02 to the character group 05, since only one movable character belongs to each character group, it is transferred to another character group during the restoration operation to the initial position. Does not physically interfere with each other, so that the accessory correction operation may be performed in parallel for each accessory group. As for the accessory group 01, since there are six movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01, it is determined in advance so that the movable accessories in the group do not physically interfere with each other during the restoration operation to the initial position. It is necessary to perform with the given operation sequence.

An example of the accessory correction operation in the accessory group 01 will be described below. In this example, when there is an abnormality in which the initial position of the peripheral control board 1510 is not detected even in one of the plurality of movable accessories belonging to the accessory group 01, the peripheral control board 1510 is physically subjected to the restoration operation to the initial position. All the movable accessories in the group are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence so as not to interfere with each other, and are restored to their initial positions.

More specifically, if even one of the movable accessories in the accessory group 01 is determined to have a photo abnormality, all the accessories in the group are stopped. The photo abnormality means that the movable accessory has not returned to the predetermined initial position. The accessory correction operation in the group is not limited to the movable accessory in the problematic location, but all the movable accessories in the group to which the problematic movable accessory belongs by using the predetermined accessory correction motor sequence data. By restoring the object to each initial position, the problematic movable accessory is restored to the correct initial position.

The accessory correction motor sequence data mainly defines the drive order of the motors to be driven and their operation times (in other words, drive start timing and drive end timing), and is defined in the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control board 1510. It is remembered in. In the case of the above-mentioned accessory group 01, since there are six movable accessories, the motors as the drive sources for driving these six movable accessories are the motor A (masked accessory) and the motor B (body deformation), respectively. Left accessory), Motor C (body deformation right accessory), Motor D (body storage-appearing accessory), Motor E (upper liquid crystal drive accessory), Motor F (lower liquid crystal drive accessory) To do.

When the restoration operation to the initial position is performed regardless of the accessory group, the motors to be driven may be driven one by one in order, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the physics of the movable accessories during the restoration operation is not limited to this. If there is no possibility of physical interference, a plurality of motors to be driven may be driven. For example, the drive start timings may be staggered to drive together, or a plurality of devices may be driven at the same time.

For example, it is assumed that a photo abnormality is detected in the fuselage storage-appearing accessory (motor D). FIG. 171 is, as an example, a timing chart in the case of performing the restoration operation to the initial position performed at this time. In FIG. 171, the restoration operation to the initial position is started at time t0. At time t0, the motor A is driven first, and at time t1, the driving of the motor A is stopped.

At the same time, that is, at time t1, the motor B and the motor C are driven at the same time. After that, at time t2, the motor E and the motor F are driven at the same time. Further, after this, the motor B and the motor C are simultaneously driven and stopped at time t3. After that, the motor E and the motor F are simultaneously stopped at time t4. Further, the motor D is driven at the same time t4. Then, at time t5, the driving of the motor D is stopped. That is, the restoration operation to the initial position is completed at time t5. It should be noted that the drive stop of each motor is conditional on the photo detection being normal.

In addition, when two or more accessory groups perform the restoration operation to the initial position (referred to as the accessory correction operation), the operating ranges of the movable accessories physically interfere with each other in different groups. If there is no such character, the character correction operation may be performed for the two character groups in parallel.

In addition, when one accessory group performs the restoration operation to the initial position (referred to as the accessory correction operation), the other accessory groups that do not interfere with each other perform the accessory correction operation. The production may be continued regardless of the operation for the production. By doing so, it is possible to continuously perform the production without interrupting the production using the movable accessory as the gaming machine.

Further, it is necessary to perform the character correction operation in this character group due to an abnormality in one character group, but when the production is in progress, the character group determined to be required to perform the character correction operation. The character correction operation of the above character may not be performed, and the effect may be performed only by the movable character of another character group. Then, after the effect of only the movable accessory of the other accessory group is completed, the accessory correction operation of the accessory group determined to be necessary is performed. Even with this, it is possible to continuously perform the production without interrupting the production using the movable accessory as the gaming machine.

[Start timing to restore to the initial position]
The start timing for the restoration operation to the initial position of the accessory is when the power is turned on, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation ends, when the jackpot opens, when the jackpot ends, when the demo is disclosed, when the demo ends, when the door is opened, when the door is closed, etc. Conceivable.

When the power is turned on, be sure to perform the character correction operation of all the character groups. For this reason, until the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power is completed, the accessory effect operation related to the advance notice and the effect at the time of fluctuation is not performed. The start timing of the accessory correction operation related to the advance notice and the effect at the time of fluctuation is valid from the next fluctuation when the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power is completed. Further, the accessory correction operation at the time of turning on the power is always executed for all the accessories regardless of whether or not each accessory is at the origin.

When the power is turned on, the accessory correction operation is, for example, (1) performing a minimum operation of the accessory on the side opposite to the initial position and removing the photo. (2) Next, the accessory is moved to the initial position to detect the photo. Execute (1) and (2) for all the characters. According to this, when the game is started, it is possible to surely execute the effect operation by the movable accessory during the game.

Regarding the point that the start timing of the character correction operation of the character group is the jackpot ending, in the case where there are six movable characters as in the character group 001, the character group 001 during the big hit game Although it takes some time for the character correction operation to be performed, since the jackpot game itself has ended, the player can be relieved if the character correction operation of the character group 001 is not related to the game.

[Retry during accessory correction operation]
When the photo cannot be detected even if the photo is not detected even if the movement to the origin (photo side) is performed by performing the character production, the initial operation when the power is turned on, or the character correction operation, for example, the movable characters collide with each other. When something goes wrong, 1 count is made, and when the number of counts reaches a predetermined number of times in a row, for example, a total of 5 counts, until the next power-on again, a role that includes a character with a photo abnormality and a character that has a photo abnormality. Make the entire object group immovable. Regarding the count of 5 times, since the count is 5 times in a row, the count number returns to "0" if the photo detection is normal (detected) even once.

If the above-mentioned character correction operation is retried and the photo is detected, the normal effect is restored. However, even if the above-mentioned character correction operation is retried (5 times in the above example), the photo is restored. If it cannot be detected, the character correction operation of the character group determined to be necessary to perform the character correction operation is not performed, and only the movable characters of other character groups that can normally perform the effect operation are performed. You may make the production act on your behalf.

In addition, when performing the accessory correction operation, if the number of times that the photo cannot be detected continuously reaches a predetermined number even if the movable accessory is moved to the origin (photo side), it is determined that the photo is abnormal and the photo is taken. An example was shown in which the abnormal character and the entire character group including the character are immovable, but the predetermined number of times, which is the criterion for determining that the photo is abnormal, is set from the preset standard number of holes. It may be configured so that the clerk can change it any number of times.
As a result, it is possible to set an appropriate number of retries on the hall side when an abnormality occurs in the accessory due to the discovery of a defect after shipment or deterioration over time and it becomes necessary to deal with the abnormality. For example, when photo abnormalities occur frequently, by setting the number of retries to be less than the standard number, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a complicated retry operation is observed by the player and the player's interest is lost. It will be possible.

For the movable accessory in the accessory group, whether or not the retry operation may be performed may be set for each type of the accessory group. In this case, depending on the specifications of the gaming machine, not only the production by the movable accessory that is not related to the main game (game content directly related to the winning) performed on the main control board 1310, but also the main game (auxiliary to the winning). There is a production by a movable character related to (game content related to). If a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of a plurality of movable characters in the character group, a retry operation is performed for the movable characters in the character group that do not cause much trouble in this game. You may not have it. On the other hand, the production by the movable accessory related to this game (the content of the game that is auxiliary to the winning) (notifying in advance that it seems to be a big hit, or notifying in advance that it will be a probability change). In the case of an accessory group that includes a movable accessory), if a failure that cannot be restored to the origin position occurs in any of the movable accessories in this accessory group, a retry operation is performed. In this way, it can be expected that the player can be reassured, and the effect that the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed can be expected.

Further, it may be set whether or not the retry operation is performed depending on the type of effect to be executed. For example, when a movable character is used for the production with the aim of encouraging the interest of the game by producing a game state that is advantageous to the player, such as during a big hit game, the character group to which the movable character to be used belongs is Make a retry operation. On the other hand, in the case of a normal game state or a reach state with a low degree of expectation, it is possible not to perform a retry operation for a movable accessory that is not related to this game (game content directly related to winning). Is.

[Notification of operation abnormality of movable accessory when photo abnormality is detected]
It is conceivable to give some kind of notification when the movable accessory breaks down (including the case where the wiring connected to control the accessory is broken). When the movable accessory breaks down, the effect display device 1600 displays, for example, "the accessory failure" in a band shape. When the movable accessory is in the accessory stop process (counted 5 times) when the photo is abnormal, the notification is started.

In addition to the display, the notification of the failure of the movable accessory may be notified by sound at the same time, and in the notification of the failure, how to combine the sound and the display according to the type of failure, etc. May be changed.

Further, when not only a plurality of movable accessories or the board surface but also a movable body provided in the frame fails, for example, the movable accessory or the movable body may be individually notified, or the accessory failure may occur. It may be notified collectively as. At this time, in the case of individual notification, the failure location may be displayed side by side on the effect display device so that the failure location can be identified. May be notified that is out of order.

In addition to the failure of the movable accessory and the movable body, for example, when the RAM is initialized, the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, but this is different from the notification related to the production. When the situations to be notified overlap, it is preferable to give priority to the RAM clear notification as a situation in which the voice needs to be sounded with priority. At this time, after the RAM clear notification sound is sounded for a predetermined period, the accessory failure is notified.

[Another response when photo anomaly is detected]
As a response when a movable accessory breaks down, as already explained, even if the accessory correction operation, which is the restoration operation to the initial position, is performed, or the accessory correction operation is performed to move the photo to the origin. When it cannot be detected, the retry operation is performed up to a predetermined number of times, but even if the retry is performed a predetermined number of times, if the accessory still cannot return to the origin and the photo cannot be detected, the accessory of the accessory group in which the failure occurred. For the character of the character group in which the trouble has not occurred, an example of continuing the production operation of the character will be described.

As already described in the block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, the main control configurations of the pachinko machine 1 are the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5. It is composed of a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4, and each control is shared. Among them, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and controls each effect device based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is done. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side drive light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the front effect unit 2600 and the back effect unit 3100 provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not all the accessories constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05 are in the reference positions, that is, there is an abnormality in the accessories constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05. Determine if it has not occurred.
Then, when it is determined that all the accessories constituting the accessory groups 01 to 05 are in the reference position and no abnormality has occurred in any of them, the normal accessory control is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 162, for example, in the accessory group 01, the mask accessory, the fuselage deformed left accessory, the fuselage deformed right accessory, the fuselage storage one appearance accessory, the upper liquid crystal driving accessory, and the lower one. It is composed of a liquid crystal driving accessory and the like. For example, depending on the location of the abnormality when the fuselage deformed left accessory occurs, the stop position of the fuselage deformed left accessory hinders the restoration operation of the fuselage deformed right accessory to the origin position. No matter how many times it is retried, it may not be possible to return all the accessories to the origin position, which may be an irreversible obstacle. At this time, a flag indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-recoverable state is provided in a RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511 for each accessory group, and 0 is stored when the pachinko machine 1 is started. When the accessory group of is in the unrecoverable state, 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to the accessory group in the unrecoverable state.

Here, as described above, each accessory group is grouped so as not to physically interfere with each other. Therefore, even if one of the accessory groups becomes irreversible, it is possible to continue driving the other accessory groups.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character group that has become unrecoverable is left as it is, and the character production is continued using the character belonging to the other character groups.

Specifically, a flag indicating that the state cannot be restored is read from the RAM (not shown) in the peripheral control unit 1511. If the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups is also 0, it is determined that no irreversible failure has occurred in any of the accessory groups, and the origin return operation is performed. Continue the character production.

Further, when 1 is stored in the flag corresponding to any of the accessory groups, it is determined that an irreversible failure has occurred in the accessory group. In that case, for the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which the flag is set to 1 and an irreversible failure has occurred, the continuation of the return operation is stopped and the operation is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption and failure of the accessory by repeatedly performing the recovery operation even though the recovery is impossible.

Here, the accessory may be an accessory that causes an effect operation by the movement of the member, but in addition to the operation of the member, the light emitting member is provided on the member of the accessory in addition to the operation. It is also possible to produce an effect by emitting light, or to form the accessory itself with a translucent member and make the accessory itself emit light by a light emitting member such as an LED provided inside the accessory. is there.

Here, when the drive signal for driving the accessory and the light emission signal for emitting the LED for decorating the accessory are set as separate systems and both can be independently controlled, an irreversible failure occurs. For the accessories belonging to the accessory group, the continuation of the return operation is stopped to stop the operation, but even if the operation of the accessory is stopped, the light emitting member provided on the accessory and the accessory are provided. Since the light emission control for emitting light itself can be performed without affecting the interference of the operation of the accessory, it is also possible to continuously perform the light emission control. At this time, the effect control that should be originally performed may be performed. As a result, even for the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which an irrecoverable failure has occurred, it is possible to continuously perform a certain degree of production by continuing the light emission control.

Further, as another method, for the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which an irreversible obstacle has occurred, the light emitting member provided on the accessory or the accessory itself is made to emit light while stopping the operation of the accessory. In the light emission control, instead of the effect control that should be performed originally, it is also possible to perform light emission control according to the location where an irreversible failure occurs, the type of failure, and the like. As a result, it is possible to grasp the location of the failure and the type of the failure depending on the light emitting mode of the accessory that has stopped operating.

Then, for the accessory group whose flag is 0, that is, the accessory belonging to the accessory group in which an irreversible failure has not occurred, the accessory operation control as usual is performed. If a failure occurs in some of the characters and the overall movement control of the characters is stopped, the movement of the characters may stop completely, which may reduce the interest of the player, but cannot be restored. By leaving the characters belonging to the troubled character group as they are and driving the characters of the character group that do not physically interfere with the characters of the non-recoverable character group, Compared with the case where the movement of the character is completely stopped, it is possible to control the movement of the character to enhance the interest of the player.

As for the notification of the operation abnormality of the movable accessory, as described above, when the movable accessory fails (not only the failure of the movable accessory itself, but also the wiring connected to control the movable accessory is broken. It is conceivable to give some kind of notification (including cases). As an example of notification when a movable accessory has broken down, there is a method of displaying, for example, "the accessory has failed" in a band shape on the effect display device 1600. Further, as will be described later, when a plurality of abnormalities such as a connector abnormality and an operation abnormality of a movable accessory are detected, it is possible to display each of the detected plurality of abnormalities. , It is also possible to display in order from the most important abnormality.

To detect that a movable accessory has failed and cannot be restored, a count is performed when the photo cannot be detected even if the accessory correction operation is performed to move the movable accessory to the origin, and then retries are performed several times. Do. If the photo detection is still not possible even after performing the accessory correction operation a predetermined number of times (five times as an example), it is assumed that the state cannot be restored, and the notification is started when the state cannot be restored.
Further, in the notification of the failure of the movable accessory, not only the notification by the display on the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 but also the notification by sound may be performed. Further, as the notification method, notification by display, notification by sound, and notification by a combination of both may be mixed, and as a method of selecting the notification method, a method of combining sound and display according to the type of failure. Etc. may be changed. Further, vibration notification may be performed using a vibration speaker described later. For example, when a plurality of abnormalities are detected, it is possible to set that the abnormality having a high importance is notified by the display on the effect display device 1600 and the abnormality having a low importance is notified by a sound.

In such an embodiment, it is not preferable that the notification by display or the notification by sound is performed more than necessary during the game in which the game is being played. Therefore, it is preferable to notify the failure of the movable accessory only by the display during the game, or to reduce the volume even if the notification is by sound.
Further, in this case, it is not necessary to consider the surrounding players and the like before the hall business is started, which is not during the game. Therefore, for the purpose of notifying the people involved in the hall, it is programmed and set in advance so that the operation abnormality of the movable accessory can be confirmed when the power is turned on, and in that case, both the display and the sound are used to make it easy to understand. You may inform the people involved in the hall. In this way, regarding the form of notification, it is advisable to set the period as well.

There are various types of halls, such as large stores with hundreds of units installed and small stores with a small number of units. In particular, when there are few people involved in the hall in a large store with a large number of units, it may not be possible to check the accessory correction operation for all the units one by one. Even in such a case, it is possible to notify the occurrence of a failure in an easy-to-understand manner by setting the display and sound to inform the persons concerned in the hall in an easy-to-understand manner as described above. Then, when it is found that the movable accessory has a failure, the person concerned in the hall can turn on the power again or repair it, so that the failure can be treated. ..

Further, as in the case of the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker during the RAM clear notification period described above, it is also possible to execute the accessory correction operation when the RAM clear process and the RAM clear notification command are received. Is.

In addition, an abnormality such as not returning to the origin due to a movable accessory provided at the bottom of the gaming machine (for example, a pop-up accessory of the accessory group 05) pinching a foreign object such as a game ball B or dust. When is detected, the vibration speaker 354 generates vibration that is transmitted to the movable accessory, and the control means executes the origin position restoration process that promotes the restoration of the movable accessory to the origin position. Good.

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part of the sound data creation process executed by the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined cycles (for example, every 16 ms), will be described later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to the present embodiment will be described. First, the background will be briefly explained.

In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene according to the progress of the game to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is supposed to improve the expectations of the player, there are some that output various sounds according to the type and some that do not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is a corresponding default each. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be reproduced may not be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be reproduced is reproduced. There was a problem that it was difficult to realize a variety of sound effects.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, for the purpose of effectively utilizing the vacant channels to realize various sound effects and enhance the interest of the player, the peripheral control MPU 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a pair of top central speakers 462, respectively. And while each channel is dynamically assigned and managed for each sound to be output from the top side speaker 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, the number of combinations of sounds to be output is each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are illustrated in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1510a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the range of the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority (sound output control means). .. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given.

[Sound control by fixed channel method]
172 (A) and 172 (B) show an example of sound control by a fixed channel system as a comparison target with respect to the present embodiment, respectively. FIG. 172 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is the one in which the reproduction channel is omitted.

On the other hand, FIG. 172 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is assigned to each reproduction channel to be used in advance. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. As a channel allocation method, a pair of a playback channel and a sound is assigned exclusively to prevent the sound from being overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted. As a channel allocation method, the same channel is assigned so that the playback timing is not affected as much as possible.

In the sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. For sounds that hinder overwriting, independent channels are assigned, or sounds that do not overlap in playback timing are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 173 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definitions of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound classification and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number is described above, the description thereof will be omitted. When a sensor such as the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects an abnormality due to a connector abnormality or the like, sound control of the classification "abnormality notification sound" and the sound name "sensor abnormality detection" is performed.

Further, when the abnormality of the initial position detection sensor (photo sensor) for detecting the initial position (origin position) of the movable accessory described above is detected, that is, when the operation abnormality of the movable accessory is detected, the classification "abnormality notification sound" is also detected. , Sound control of the sound name "sensor abnormality detection".
If you want to distinguish between a connector abnormality and an operation abnormality of a movable accessory, for example, in FIG. 173, ch02 is currently assigned as the sound name "sensor abnormality detection", but the movable accessory is assigned. A dedicated channel may be provided as a fixed channel, such as by additionally allocating ch03 for the abnormality detection of the initial position detection sensor when an operation abnormality is detected. At this time, in order to reliably notify the abnormality detection, it is preferable to assign the abnormality detection to the fixed channel when the fixed channel and the automatic channel are used together.

Further, when different abnormalities are duplicated when they are distinguished according to the type of abnormality, the importance of the type of abnormality may be determined in advance. For example, if the importance is set in advance so that the importance is reduced in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory failure, and if these abnormalities occur in duplicate, the importance is high and the highest priority is given. A notification sound (“RAM has been cleared”) that identifies the RAM clear that must be performed may be notified.

In this case, among the abnormalities that occur repeatedly, the abnormalities with high importance are more important to be notified than the abnormalities with low importance. Therefore, the abnormalities with low importance are not notified immediately. Remember that an abnormality has occurred, and after the high-importance abnormality is resolved or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the notification of the high-importance abnormality was started, the memorized low-importance abnormality The notification sound (“Magnetic detection” or “Characteristic failure”) may be notified until the abnormality is resolved or for a predetermined period of time.

When duplicate abnormalities occur and notification is performed sequentially, notification is performed in descending order of importance, and after notification of the abnormality with the highest importance is completed, notification of the next most important abnormality is performed. However, the notification period of the notification sound of the less important abnormality is set to be longer, and the notification sound of the less important abnormality is combined with the less important notification sound from the time when the abnormality occurs. While notifying the abnormal notification sound, the volume of the high-importance notification sound is increased and the volume of the low-importance notification sound is set low so that the high-importance notification sound can be heard better at first. However, when the notification period for high-importance abnormalities ends, the volume is increased so that the notification sound for identifying low-importance abnormalities can be heard well, until the abnormalities are resolved, or a predetermined predetermined value. It is also possible to notify the period.

In addition, when the timing of occurrence of an abnormality is different, for example, magnetism is detected while notifying that the accessory is out of order (“it is an accessory failure”) due to the occurrence of the accessory failure. When notifying the fact that the magnetism has been detected (“magnetism has been detected”), the order of notification is changed based on the type of abnormality as described above.
In this case, the mode of notification is switched from "abnormal character" to "magnetism detected". Then, when the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the failure of the accessory is notified again.

Regarding the types of abnormalities, the importance is set in the order of RAM clear, magnetic detection, and accessory abnormality according to the importance. For other abnormalities, the order of importance can be set as appropriate according to each abnormality.
As for the mode of notification, sound, display, or a combination of sound and display may be used for notification. For example, in the above example, "Abnormality of accessory" is displayed on the display device during voice notification, and when the abnormality due to magnetism is resolved, the display is erased and the accessory is displayed again. Notify the failure by voice. The mode of notification is switched according to the situation by using the speaker or display device used for the production, such as sound, sound and display. In particular, with regard to display devices, in recent years, a plurality of small liquid crystals have been used as accessory devices for production, but for the main display device that displays an abnormal situation on the small display device and displays a lottery symbol, the abnormal situation is displayed. It is advisable not to display it so as not to interfere with the game as much as possible.

The left and right pan initial values are the initial positions of sound image localization by the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). Represents. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, the volume output from the upper left speaker and the upper right speaker is different, and the sound image is localized in any space between the left and right speakers. Can be done. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it means that it is output only from the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464. For example, when it is set to "0x80", it means that the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 are output. The volume difference output individually from, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the output is output from only the right speaker.

The upper and lower pan initial values represent, for example, the initial positions of sound image localization by the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the upper and lower speakers of one main body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the upper and lower pan settings during sound reproduction, the volume output from the upper and lower speakers differs, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. .. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it means that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x80", the volume difference that is output individually from the upper and lower speakers that are a combination of these is It becomes 0 and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

The initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xff". The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds. The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 174 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the reproduced channel. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 175 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 175 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 175 (C) states that each sound cannot be reproduced when it is attempted to be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. In these FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (C), the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

In FIG. 175 (A), the game states are "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit" in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 175 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "first half notice A" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", so that the "first half notice A" The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 175 (A), for example, as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 175 (C), a start opening prize is won during the playback time of "full screen notice" as a new sound ("hold" in the figure). If there is a "winning"), as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full-screen notice", so that the "full-screen notice" is given. The playback sound of "" is overwritten by the hold winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment will be described. 176 (A) and 176 (B) show an example of sound control by the automatic channel method as the present embodiment, respectively.

FIG. 176 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-mentioned sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). The point is different. Here, the fact that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically assigned according to a rule described later (described above). Equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

In the sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, as in the sound control by the fixed channel method described above, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is an omission of the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 176 (B) shows an example of assigning a reproduction channel to each sound. In the sound control by this automatic channel method, priority is assigned to each sound individually as shown in the figure. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when it is output in stereo, while one channel is required when it is output in monaural. Become.

The illustrated "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shall not be muted in the middle of the sound that started the reproduction under any circumstances until the end of the reproduction. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound at which playback is started is overwritten with another sound during playback and muted.

In the sound control by the automatic channel method, each playback channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While a plurality of AUTO groups can be defined, a plurality of playback channels can be defined within the AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce the sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority for designating a specific AUTO group can be specified in each AUTO group. If a sound is defined in the AUTO group when a new sound is reproduced, if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the specified AUTO group, the sound is immediately reproduced.

In the above case, if there is no free channel, the effect control program searches all the channels currently being played in the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly played. If there is a channel having a lower priority or the same as the sound being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than the sound being reproduced or is not the same, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound.

FIG. 177 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, the playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, up / down pan initial value, volume initial value, such as the sound control by the fixed channel already explained, are used for each sound division and sound name. Instead of the sound number, playback type setting and output type setting, an identifier and priority for specifying the AUTO group (also called "playback priority"), left and right pan initial value, upper and lower pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages the definitions of numbers, seekpoints, playback type settings, and output type settings.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates which AUTO group in which each sound is reproduced in a plurality of AUTO groups. Further, the priority order is an index indicating which sound should be reproduced with priority when each sound is reproduced at the same time. In this priority order, the larger the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the less preferentially the sound should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, the order of the types of sounds to be reproduced with priority is, for example, a notification sound having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3"). , A sound effect with a priority of "20" ("big hit confirmation sound" and "button press sound"), a BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10". Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with a priority of "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), and pending winning sounds with a priority of "01" It is supposed to be. As a result, when an attempt is made to reproduce a notification sound in a state where there is no free channel, for example, it is not necessary to reproduce using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound having a lower priority (for example, a pending winning sound) is not required to be reproduced. ) Is being played back, and the notification sound is played with priority.

As described above, the initial left and right pan values are the sounds produced by the left and right speakers in combination with the upper left speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464) and the upper right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). It represents the initial position of the sound image localization of. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound reproduction, a difference is created in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the left and right speakers. This left and right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, when "0x00" is set, it means that the output is output only from the left speaker of the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464). The volume difference individually output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the right speaker (top center speaker 462 and top side speaker 464).

Further, as described above, the upper and lower pan initial values represent, for example, the initial sound image localization positions of the pair of top side speakers 464, the pair of top center speakers 462, and the upper and lower speakers of one main body frame speaker 622. By dynamically changing the left and right pan settings during sound playback, there is a difference in the volume output individually from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image is localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. Can be done. This upper and lower bread initial value is managed as bread information. For example, when it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output from only a pair of upper speakers 573, and when it is set to "0x80", for example, the volume difference which is output individually from the upper and lower speakers which are a combination of these. Is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, when "0xff" is set, it indicates that the output is output only from the main body frame speaker 622, which is the lower speaker.

Similarly, the initial volume value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, for example, it can be set in the setting range from "0x00" to "0xff", and in addition, "1" (0x1ff if 0xff) is in the third byte. By setting), it will not be affected by the volume change caused by operating one or more volume control devices provided in the gaming machine, and it will always be played at the volume set by the initial value. Represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each of the above-mentioned sounds.

The seek point represents the playback start position number in the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as this seek point, for example, "0" is set for each of the "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to the "first half notice A sound effect", while the "second half notice A sound effect" and the "second half notice B effect" are set. [1] is set for each of "sound". With such a seek point, it is possible to register sounds in excess of the maximum number that can be registered in the sound source when the maximum number of sounds that can be registered is exceeded.

The playback type setting is either loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays the target sound once. It represents whether it is. The output type setting indicates whether to reproduce the target sound in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 178 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound, and the priority. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the gaming state, and the gaming states are, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop", and "big hit". Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (regeneration) priority, and the (regeneration) priority increases from the bottom to the top.

FIG. 178 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 178 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In FIGS. 178 (A) and 178 (B), the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 178 (A), "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "middle symbol stop" are sequentially arranged along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis. It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "during a big hit".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range A). Here, when an attempt is made to reproduce the hold prize sound as a new sound because there is a start opening prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure), the playback channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold winning sound can be played back using the playback channels 12 to 13, none of the playing sounds is overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other sounds are not overwritten. The output of all kinds of sounds continues.

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179 (A), as shown in FIG. 179 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "reach BGM reproduction" is reproduced from beginning to end on the reproduction channels 00 to 01 ( Corresponds to range B). Here, for example, if a start prize (corresponding to the “hold prize” in the figure) is to be played and the hold prize sound is to be played as a new sound, the playback channels 04 to 05 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The output of all other types of sounds continues without any of the sounds being played being overwritten by the hold winning sound (corresponding to the "hold sound play" in the figure).

In the "second half of the fluctuation" shown in FIG. 179 (A), for example, since a notification (corresponding to the "notification 2 generation" in the figure) is generated after that, the notification sound having the highest priority of "25" as a new sound ( When an attempt is made to reproduce (corresponding to the illustrated "notification 2"), as a result of searching for a free channel, it is found that there is no free channel at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 179 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being played at the start timing is searched, and the playback channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels playing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the hold winning sound is reproduced as described above, but the priority (25) of the notification sound (corresponding to the “notification sound 2” in the figure) to be reproduced next is set. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sounds, the reserved winning sounds being reproduced on the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are overwritten by the notification sound.

FIG. 180 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is used as the work name for each channel, such as setting reservation flag, required sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority at the time of automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, and volume control. It includes a work for pan and a work for pan control, and has each information corresponding to these.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that the setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly assigned when it is "0", while the channel is automatically assigned when it is "1" ("Sound control by the automatic channel method" described later. Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, if it is "1", it indicates that it is AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority when sound control is performed by the automatic channel method described later.

The elapsed time from the registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound as "0". The elapsed time from the registration is the elapsed time among the plurality of playing sounds when trying to play a new sound in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. It is used to determine which sound should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-mentioned left and right pan and upper and lower pan set values.

FIG. 181 shows an example of a free channel search process when performing sound control when only one AUTO group is defined in the automatic channel system. In FIG. 181 as well, the channel is abbreviated as "ch".

When there is a request for reproducing a new sound (step S1100), the effect control program confirms the automatic allocation group for the new sound (step S1102), and if this automatic allocation group is "0", the fixed allocation is performed. Is determined, and playback of a new sound is started on the specified channel.

On the other hand, when the automatic allocation group is other than "0", the effect control program determines that the automatic allocation is performed, and determines whether or not the new sound corresponds to the monaural channel (step S1106). ..

When the new sound is monaural, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a vacant (monaural) channel (1 channel) (step S1108), and if it exists, the vacant (monaural) channel. ) While starting the reproduction of the new sound on the channel (step S1109), if it does not exist, the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority as the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced. It is determined whether or not the channel exists (step S1110).

The effect control program terminates the process if there is no channel of the reproduced sound having the same or lower priority than the new sound in the (monaural) channel being reproduced, and if it exists, the effect control program terminates the process. Determines whether or not a plurality of corresponding channels exist (step S1112).

When a plurality of the corresponding channels exist, the effect control program is playing the sound having the longest playback time from the registration among the corresponding channels based on the elapsed time from the registration described above. The reproduction of the new sound is started on the (monaural) channel of (step S1114). On the other hand, when the corresponding channel does not exist but is one, the effect control program starts the reproduction of the new sound on the (monaural) channel satisfying the desired condition (step S1116).

On the other hand, in step S1106 described above, when the effect control program determines that the new sound is not monaural, it determines whether or not there are vacant (stereo) channels (2 channels) (step). S1120). When the effect control program determines that an empty channel exists, it selects a (stereo) channel that satisfies a desired condition and starts reproducing the new sound (step S1122).

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no free channel, the effect control program determines whether or not there is a new sound having the same or lower priority in the (stereo) channel of the sound being played (step). S1124) Since the process is terminated if it does not exist, the sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the new sound to be reproduced. On the other hand, if it exists, the effect control program determines whether or not there are a plurality of corresponding channels (step S1126).

The production control program starts the output of the new sound on the (stereo) channel that satisfies the desired condition when there are not a plurality of corresponding channels, while the effect control program is described above when there are a plurality of corresponding channels. Based on the elapsed time from registration, the reproduction of the new sound is started on the (stereo) channel having the longest reproduction time from registration among the corresponding channels (step S1130).

As described above, the effect control program searches for an empty channel in order to reproduce a new sound. Such a search process for free channels will be described in a more visually easy-to-understand manner.

182 (A) and 182 (B) to 185 (A) and 185 (B) each show an example of specific contents of the free channel search process. As shown in FIG. 182 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for normal BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, normal BGM reproduction is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 182 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A having a priority of 05 occurs, and reproduce channels 02 to 03. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hotan pressing sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 04 to 05. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the button pressing sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 06 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 07, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_B is started in stereo using these playback channels 06 to 07.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound having a priority of 20 occurs, and sets the reproduction channels 08 to 09. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the jackpot confirmed sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 08 to 09.

Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a request for reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C having the priority of 05 occurs, and the reproduction channel 10 is performed. Since there is a vacancy in ~ 11, the reproduction of the sound effect of the first half notice_C is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and selects the reproduction channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 185 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and sets the playback channels 14 to 15. Since there is a vacancy, the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

186 (A) and 186 (B) to 189 (A) and 189 (B) show specific examples of the contents of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 186 (A), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for reach BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the reproduction of the reach BGM is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 186 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 02 to 03 have vacancy. Since it exists, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03.

After repeating the above processing, the production control program then, as shown in FIG. 187 (A), triggers a playback request for the full-screen warning sound having a priority of 10 to generate an empty channel. Since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 10 to 11, the reproduction of the full-screen warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 10 to 11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187 (B), the effect control program searches for an empty channel when a playback request for the notification sound 1 having a priority of 25 occurs, and in FIG. 187 (A). As shown, since there is a vacancy in the reproduction channels 02 to 03 (corresponding to "non-reproduction (empty)" in the figure), the reproduction of the sound effect of the notification sound 1 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 02 to 03. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 136 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a playback request for the notification sound 3 having a priority of 25 occurs, and the playback channels 04 to 05 (playback channels 04 to 05). Since there is a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the notification sound 3 is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 04 to 05.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the accessory warning sound having a priority of 10 occurs, and reproduces channels 12 to 13. Since there is a vacancy in the space, the reproduction of the accessory warning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 12 to 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the hold winning sound having a priority of 01 occurs, and reproduces channels 14 to 15 (reproduction channels 14 to 15 (A). Since there was a vacancy in (corresponding to the "non-reproduction (vacant)" shown in the figure), the reproduction of the hold winning sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 14 to 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189 (B), the effect control program searches for a free channel when a playback request for the notification sound 2 having a priority of 25 occurs, but the free channel does not exist. Therefore, the use of playback by the playback channels 14 to 15 that are playing the "holding winning sound" having the lowest priority in each channel corresponding to the sound being played is stopped, and the playback channels 14 to 15 are used. Playback of the notification sound 2 which is a desired sound in stereo is started.

In this way, each sound to be output is not fixedly assigned to a specific channel in advance, and a playback channel having a lower priority is searched according to the priority of the sound, and the output schedule having a higher priority is obtained. Each sound of is played on the playback channel found by the search. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only can the vacant channels be effectively utilized as described above, but also each sound to be output can be produced as many as possible by using each channel including the vacant channel. Since it can be played back, it is possible to realize a variety of sound effects and enhance the interest of the player.

FIGS. 190 (A) and 190 (B) to 191 (A) and 191 (B) show specific examples of the contents of the free channel search process, respectively. As shown in FIG. 190 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the left symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and the reproduction channels 00 to 01 are vacant. Therefore, the reproduction of the left symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

As shown in FIG. 190 (B), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the right symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and vacates the reproduction channels 00 to 01. Therefore, the reproduction of the right symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (A), the effect control program searches for vacant channels when a request for reproduction of the medium symbol stop sound having a priority of 15 occurs, and reproduces channels 00 to 01. Since there is a vacancy in, the reproduction of the middle symbol stop sound is started in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

Next, as shown in FIG. 191 (B), the effect control program searches for free channels when a playback request for the jackpot BGM having a priority of 15 occurs, and the playback channels 00 to 01 are free. Therefore, the jackpot BGM is started to be reproduced in stereo using these reproduction channels 00 to 01.

In addition, when the replacement playback of the sound according to the priority occurs using a certain playback channel, the effect control program restores the previous sound played on the playback channel before the replacement after the completion of the playback. It goes without saying that it is okay to do so.

[Variations of sound control]
In the above embodiment, the automatic channel method for sound control using all the playback channels for the maximum number of channels has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned fixed channel sound control is used. Sound control may be performed as follows depending on the combination or the like.

FIGS. 192 (A) to 192 (F) are diagrams showing variations of channel allocation in sound control by the two types of channel methods described above or combinations thereof, respectively.

FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of channel allocation in sound control by the maximum number of channels (16 channels) fixed channel method described so far as a comparative example with the above-described embodiment, and FIG. 192 (B) shows this. Corresponding to the embodiment of the present invention described above, an example of channel allocation in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel method for the maximum number of channels is shown. Since the sound control by assigning these two channels has already been described, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 192 (C) shows an embodiment in which channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed by the automatic channel method (corresponding to “PTN2” in the figure). .. FIG. 192 (D) shows an embodiment in which one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, and some playback channels are sound-controlled by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN3" in the figure).

FIG. 192 (E) shows an embodiment in which channel allocation is performed for the maximum number of playback channels while using a plurality of automatic channel groups, and sound control is performed for some playback channels by the fixed channel method described above. (Corresponds to "PTN4" in the figure). A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 192 and later.

In FIG. 192 (F), one automatic channel group is used, channels are assigned to the maximum number of playback channels, sound control is performed by the automatic channel method, and some playback channels are sounded by the fixed channel method described above. Control is performed, but the difference from the above example is that the number of channels is secured so that the number of each reproduction channel is variable. A specific example of the channel system shown in FIG. 192 (F) will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 192 and later.

As shown in this embodiment, by adopting an automatic channel system in which all channels are grouped into one group, free channels are assigned or channels being output are replaced based on a predetermined standard, so that sound is produced. Sound can be output simply by determining the priority of. Therefore, unlike the conventional control method that outputs sound by specifying a channel, channel management is not required, so it is possible to simplify control related to sound output and improve development efficiency. It becomes.

Further, by adopting the automatic channel method, it is possible to minimize the number of channels. For example, it is possible to adopt a low-priced sound source IC having a small number of channels, and the manufacturing cost of the gaming machine is reduced. be able to.

[15. Another form of sound control by the automatic channel method]
Subsequently, the details of another form of the sound control method described above will be described. In the sound control method described above, as an automatic channel method, the sound assignment to each channel is dynamically changed so that many sounds can be reproduced by effectively utilizing the empty channels. In recent diversified gaming machines, hundreds or thousands of types of sounds are selected and output, which may complicate the management of sound sources.

In addition, by outputting a plurality of sounds in an overlapping manner, it is possible to execute a preliminary announcement effect in duplicate, or to enable a variety of sound effects with a small number of sound sources. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (C), by dividing the sound into a plurality of groups and dynamically allocating the plurality of sounds to the reproduction channel for each group, the sounds are surely duplicated and output. can do. It also has the advantage of facilitating management by dividing the sound by type.

Further, the sound includes a sound that should be output with priority over the production sound such as a notification sound and a sound that is continuously output such as BGM. For these sounds, it is more convenient to fix the output channel than to dynamically assign the channel. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (D), the sound that is output with priority and the sound that is always output are output by the fixed channel method, and the sound that changes according to the result of the start prize or the variable display is output. Output using the automatic channel method.

With the above configuration, it is possible to effectively utilize the vacant channels by the automatic channel method and prevent unnecessary channel switching control from occurring by the fixed channel method. Further, since it is possible to classify by the type of sound such as BGM, effect sound, and notification sound, it becomes easy to manage the effect data.

The sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) is a combination of the sound control methods shown in FIGS. 192 (C) and 192 (D), and has the advantages of each method. Hereinafter, the sound control method shown in FIG. 192 (E) will be specifically described.

[15-1. Sound control in which fixed channel system and multiple automatic channel system are mixed]
In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the number of channels in the sound source control is 32 channels (ch), and includes a channel for reproducing sound by the fixed channel method and a channel for reproducing sound by the automatic channel method. .. Further, the channels for reproducing the sound by the automatic channel method are divided into two groups. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to FIG. 193.

[15-1-1. Playback channel configuration]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing an example of a configuration table of playback channels in sound source control according to the present embodiment. As described above, in the sound source control of the present embodiment, 32 channels are used, and a unique identifier (channel number) is assigned to each channel.

The channel configuration table includes "automatic allocation" indicating whether or not automatic allocation is performed for the channel number, "classification" indicating the group to which each channel belongs, and "purpose of use" of each channel. A "remark" is added as a supplement to the configuration table shown in FIG. 193.

As shown in FIG. 193, the configuration of each channel of the present embodiment is as follows: channel numbers 0 to 7 are fixed channel systems, 8 to 19 are automatic channel systems, 20 to 23 are fixed channel systems, and 24 to 29. Is an automatic channel system, and 30 and 31 are fixed channel systems.

Further, the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 8 to 19 are "AUTO group 1", and the channels of the automatic channel system of channel numbers 24 to 29 are "AUTO group 2".

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, sound can be output in stereo, and in the case of stereo output, one pair (two) of channels is used. On the other hand, in the case of monaural output, one channel is used.

The channel with channel number 0 (hereinafter referred to as "channel 0" and each channel is represented by a "channel number" which is the "channel" channel number + 1) is a channel used for the system. For example, it is a channel for outputting sound that is commonly used by manufacturers regardless of a specific model. Specifically, it is a sound that is output while displaying the manufacturer's logo when the gaming machine is started. Further, channel 1 is a channel that is paired with channel 0 when sound is output in stereo.

Channel 2 is a channel used to output BGM during a game or in a customer waiting state. Channel 3 is a channel that is paired with channel 2 when BGM is output in stereo. Similarly, channel 4 and channel 5 are channels used to output BGM, and channel 6 and channel 7 are channels that are paired with channel 5 and channel 6 when BGM is output in stereo. is there.

Further, in the present embodiment, not only the stereo output is performed, but also the sound quality of the BGM is improved by simultaneously outputting a plurality of sounds. Therefore, a plurality of (paired) channels can be used to output BGM, and BGM1 to BGM3 can be output at the same time. Furthermore, as will be described later, since it is possible to output BGM also on channel 20 (and channel 21), it is possible to output four BGMs at the same time using a maximum of eight channels (4 pairs). It has become.

While the gaming machine is operating normally, the BGM is continuously output, and a predetermined sound source is repeatedly played back. Therefore, the channel for reproducing the BGM is continuously occupied, and it is more efficient to fix the channel in advance than to dynamically allocate the channel. Therefore, in the sound source control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the channel for reproducing the BGM is a fixed channel system, and only the BGM is output. As a result, it is possible to simplify the control as compared with reproducing the sound only by the automatic channel method while preventing the generation of empty channels.

Channels 8 to 19 are channels for reproducing the sound output when the advance notice effect is executed. In the advance notice production, the sound selected by lottery is output each time according to the result of the variable display, the degree of expectation, the progress of the game, and the like. In this way, the channel can be effectively used by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output each time based on a predetermined condition.

In the present embodiment, unlike the above-described example, the channels to which the automatic channel method is applied are grouped. The group of channels that output the sound at the time of the advance notice production is AUTO group 1.

When the sound is output when the advance notice effect is executed, the peripheral control MPU first searches for an empty channel among the channels assigned to the AUTO group 1. In the case of stereo, free channels for two channels are searched, and in principle, continuous channels are set as output channels. At this time, if there is a free channel, the sound specified from the free channel is set to be output. On the other hand, when there is no free channel, the channel in use is opened to output a new sound or the output of the specified sound is stopped based on a predetermined condition. The detailed procedure for channel selection will be described later with reference to FIG. 194.

Channels 20 and 21 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. The channel 21 is a channel that is paired with the channel 20 at the time of stereo output. Channels 20 and 21 are channels for outputting BGM output or effect sound. It is used when outputting BGM by superimposing four sounds or when outputting a specific effect sound. The specific effect sound is, for example, a sound output by an effect other than the advance notice effect output by the automatic channel method.

Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied, similarly to channels 20 and 21. The channel 23 is a channel that is paired with the channel 22 at the time of stereo output. Channels 22 and 23 are channels to which the reserved sound is output. The hold sound output on the channels 22 and 23 may be, for example, a sound output regardless of the lottery result at the time of starting winning, or a sound output with priority when a big hit is confirmed. The sound based on the lottery result at the time of starting winning is output from channels 24 to 29 as described later.

Channels 24 to 29 are channels to which the automatic channel method is applied. Channels 24 to 29 reproduce sounds that are output based on the degree of expectation according to the lottery result at the start winning prize and sounds that are output when the hold display changes at the start of fluctuation. By outputting channels 22 and 23 in a fixed channel system, it is possible to reliably output the sound at the time of jackpot confirmation even when there are no empty channels in channels 24 to 29, which attracts the attention of the player. Can be done.

Channels 30 and 31 are channels to which the fixed channel method is applied. Channels 30 and 31 are channels used for the system. The channel 30 outputs a change sound when the volume is changed and a notification sound when the game medium is paid out. Further, the channel 31 outputs a notification sound when an abnormality occurs in the gaming machine. In this way, a fixed channel system in which an output destination is secured in advance is applied so that the notification sound related to the operation of the gaming machine and the notification sound when an abnormality occurs are surely transmitted to the outside.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a fixed channel type channel is assigned when the output is constantly continued like BGM or when it is necessary to output reliably like an abnormality notification sound. On the other hand, by applying the automatic channel method to the sound that is output flexibly according to the game state, it is possible to prevent the sound from being output even though there are empty channels, and to create a finite number of channels. It can be used effectively.

[Free channel search process]
Subsequently, a procedure for searching for an empty channel for sound source control according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the free channel search process in the case of executing the control for outputting the sound of the present embodiment. Although FIG. 181 describes the case where there is one AUTO group, FIG. 194 differs in that it has a plurality of AUTO groups. The description of common processing will be omitted.

In the free channel search process shown in FIG. 194, in the processes of steps S1108 and S1120, when the new sound is an automatic channel system, it is determined whether or not there are free channels in the same group of channels. That is, even if the channels of different groups are vacant, if there is no vacancy in the group of the same channel, the result of step S1108 and step S1120 is "No".

Further, in the free channel search process shown in FIG. 194, when there is no free channel, the reproduction of the sound output from the channel selected based on a predetermined condition is stopped, and a new sound is output from the channel (step). S1118, step S1132). Hereinafter, the selection conditions of the channel for stopping the sound reproduction will be described with reference to FIG. 195. It should be noted that the effect in which the sound output is stopped is continuously executed without stopping the image display and the operation of the accessory.

FIG. 195 is a diagram showing an example of a condition for selecting a channel for replacing the sound output (stopping or opening the sound reproduction) when the channel is not available at the time of outputting a new sound in the present embodiment. .. As a specific selection condition, the attributes of the sound being played and the new sound are compared, and the sound having a higher importance is prioritized. As will be described later, the attributes include the playback time, whether the output is stereo or monaural, the volume level, the amount of change in the sound during playback, and the sound playback time at the time of channel selection. Includes remaining playback time. Hereinafter, each condition will be specifically described.

Condition 1 selects a channel based on the playback time (elapsed time) from the start of playback. For example, as shown in steps S1114 and S1130 of FIG. 181, a channel having a long reproduction time is selected. By selecting a channel having a long elapsed time from the start of reproduction in this way, the output of the sufficiently executed effect sound is ended, and it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the new effect has been executed.

Condition 2 selects a channel based on the playback time of the entire effect. For example, a production with a long playback time can have a high degree of expectation, so a production with a short playback time is selected. On the other hand, by canceling the effect having a long reproduction time, the influence on the effect to be executed thereafter may be minimized. In this case, the determination is made based on the total playback time set in advance, regardless of the playback time from the start of playback.

Condition 1 and condition 2 are conditions related to the reproduction time, but in addition to this, for example, the sound output of the effect having a short (or long) remaining effect time may be stopped. Further, the channel may be selected according to the elapsed time from the start of reproduction, that is, the progress ratio of the effect with respect to the total time of the effect. By setting the conditions in this way, the sound output can be stopped at the initial stage or the final stage of the production.

Condition 3 selects a channel based on the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, an effect in which a loud sound is output can be a more important effect, so a channel having a low volume in the output sound is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel having a large volume of the output sound may be preferentially selected so that the player recognizes that the effect is newly executed.

Condition 4 selects a channel based on a change in the volume of the sound being reproduced. For example, it is assumed that an effect in which a fade-in or fade-out sound is output can be an effect of higher importance, and a channel having a small amount of change in volume is preferentially selected. On the contrary, the channel with a large change in volume may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 5 selects a channel based on a dynamic change in the sound image localization position (panpot). For example, as a production that brings about a more three-dimensional sound effect by changing the output of the left and right sounds of the stereo speakers can be a more important production, a channel with little change in the dynamic sound image localization position is used. Select with priority. On the other hand, a channel with a large change in the dynamic sound image localization position may be preferentially selected to reduce the load of sound control.

Condition 6 selects a channel based on the sound number (index). For example, select a number with a higher (smaller) note number. At this time, the priority may be associated with the sound number.

Condition 7 selects a channel depending on whether the sound is monaural or stereo. For example, assuming that a production that outputs a stereo sound with good sound quality has a higher degree of expectation, a channel that outputs a monaural sound is selected. On the other hand, since monaural sound uses only one channel, if the number of free channels is insufficient even if the channel that outputs monaural sound is opened, select the channel that outputs stereo sound to increase the free channels. You may do it.

Condition 8 selects a channel depending on whether or not volume adjustment is permitted. For example, an effect set so that the volume cannot be adjusted may be more important, or an effect set so as to be able to adjust the volume may be more important.

In addition to the conditions shown above, for example, in the case of the same priority, a new sound reproduction request may be discarded without switching channels. Further, by assigning a unique priority to all the sounds, the effect data may be set so as not to have the same priority.

The table shown in FIG. 195 shows the conditions 1 to 8 as an example, but these conditions may be applied individually or in combination of a plurality of conditions. For example, a threshold value may be set for each condition and a channel satisfying more conditions may be selected, or a priority may be set for each condition and the conditions may be applied sequentially.

[Volume control]
Next, an example of controlling channel allocation based on the priority assigned to the newly output sound will be described. Here, an example in which three types of notices (first half notices A to C) are executed in the first half of the fluctuation will be described. FIG. 196 is a timing chart showing an effect example for explaining the sound control of the present embodiment, (A) shows the timing at which the sound effect is reproduced, and (B) shows the channel where each sound effect is output. ing. FIG. 197 is a diagram showing an example of the priority order of sound effects in the production example of the present embodiment.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 196, the first half notice_A occurs when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display. At this time, an operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the display screen, and when the player operates the effect button, the first half notice_B is generated. Further, the first half notice C occurs while the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B are being executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 145, the priority of the first half notice_A is 03, the priority of the first half notice_B is 05, and the priority of the first half notice_C is 20. Further, since the volume suppression flag is set for the first half notice_B and the first half notice_C, when the lower priority notice effects are duplicated in the same group, the volume is increased based on the suppression volume value. It will be reduced.

Explaining the contents of each notice, the first half notice_A is, for example, an effect in which a character appears, and the character appears on the display screen and sound effects are output in stereo from channels 08 and 09.

The first half notice_B is an effect executed by the operation of the effect button, and the button press sound is played when the button is operated (channels 18 and 19), the first half notice_B is started, and the effect is stereo from channels 10 and 11. Sound is output.

In the first half notice_C, along with the output of the sound effect (channels 12 and 13), the screen display is stopped for a predetermined time, and the sound having a lower priority than the first half notice_C, specifically, other notice effects and BGM are temporarily The sound is muted (blackout production). After that, when the effect screen is displayed, the output of sound effects other than the first half notice_C is resumed.

Here, the volume change of the sound effect of each notice effect will be described in more detail with reference to FIG. 198. FIG. 198 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the first half variation of the present embodiment, (A) shows the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) shows the volume change of each effect sound effect. The horizontal axis represents the time axis, and the vertical axis of (B) represents the volume.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation display is started from the time t0, and the first half notice_A is started at the time t1. At this time, it is output at the preset volume V_A of the effect sound effect of the first half notice_A.

After that, the operation instruction of the effect button is displayed on the effect screen, and the first half notice_B is executed by pressing the effect button (time t2). At this time, the button pressing sound of the effect button is reproduced at the volume V_T, and the effect sound effect of the first half notice_B is output at the volume V_B. Further, since the priority of the first half notice_B is higher than the priority of the first half notice_A, the volume of the sound effect of the first half notice_A is suppressed to 50%.

If the priority of the advance notice effect executed later is lower than or the same as the priority of the advance notice effect being executed, it is not necessary to lower the volume, and even if the sound effects output at the same time are small. You do not have to lower the volume. Further, the volume may be lowered only in the case of a specific combination of advance notice effects.

Further, when the first half notice C is executed at the time t3, the screen is dimmed until the time t5, and the sound effects other than the first half notice_C are muted. At this time, the sound effect of the first half notice_C is output at the volume V_C.

Further, the output of the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B effect sound effects muted from the time t3 is resumed at the time t5. Originally, the button pressing sound is output until the time t4, but since t5> t4, the reproduction ends at the time t3.

After that, the first half notice_A and the first half notice_B continue to be produced until the preset end time (time t6, t7). Further, at time t7, the first half notice_B ends, and the first half of the fluctuation ends.

During the period when the effect sound effect is muted, the output of the effect sound effect may be continued with the volume set to 0, or the output of the effect sound effect may be stopped. When the volume is set to 0, the volume (sub volume) for each channel may be set to 0, or the main volume that controls the volume of the entire staging sound effect is set to 0, and the output of the sound effect of the first half notice_C. May be bypassed and output so as not to be affected by the control by the main volume. Further, even if the output of other sound effects is suppressed by the first half notice_C, the sound effects, warning sounds, and notification sounds having higher priority are output.

As described above, when outputting a new sound and lowering the volume of the sound being played, instead of lowering the volume of the sound specified by the volume suppression flag etc., the volume of the sound being played on all channels is lowered. It may be lowered, or the volume of the sound being played on the same channel (fixed channel method, automatic channel method) may be lowered. Further, the volume of the sound being played on the channels in the same group (AUTO group) may be lowered.

[effect]
With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the sound having a high priority can be preferentially output. High-priority sounds are, for example, sounds such as notification sounds and warning sounds that are surely transmitted to players and employees of the amusement park, and there is a high expectation that the result of variable display will be a big hit. It may be a sound effect to raise the expectation of the game, or it may be a sound effect that has a high directing effect and can improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, by classifying each channel used in the sound source control into a plurality of groups, it is possible to facilitate the management of the staging data related to the staging sound effect. This makes it possible to improve development efficiency, such as suppressing the occurrence of bugs by conducting systematic tests. In addition, by enabling stable games, it is possible to improve the interest of the games.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the channels of the automatic channel system are classified into a plurality of groups. Specifically, there are a group that outputs the sound effect of the advance notice effect (AUTO group 1) and a group that outputs the hold-related sound effect (AUTO group 2). The number of sound effects for the preview effect is enormous compared to the number of channels, and a plurality of effect sound effects can be reproduced at the same time. In particular, in the first half of the fluctuation, it may be required to output an effect sound effect exceeding the number of allocated channels, such as executing a pre-reading notice of the pending fluctuation together with the notice of the fluctuation. In such a case, the interest of the game can be maximized by outputting the low-priority effect sound effect while replacing it with the high-priority effect sound effect in the channel assigned to the AUTO group 1. ..

Further, the change of the hold display of the variable display and the effect of notifying the degree of expectation by outputting the effect sound effect along with the change can greatly increase the expectation of the player, and it is desirable that the effect is surely executed. .. In the present embodiment, by outputting the effect sound effect related to the hold display (hold sound) from the channel belonging to the AUTO group 2, it is possible to more reliably reproduce the effect sound independently of the advance notice effect related to the variable display. it can. In addition, unlike the case of the advance notice effect in the variable display, the number of effect sound effects output at the same time does not greatly exceed the number of channels assigned to AUTO group 2, so the output of the effect sound effect is stopped. It is less likely to be done. Moreover, even if it is canceled, the output of the low-priority effect sound effect is only canceled. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by surely executing the highly effective production that raises the expectation of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, the channel to which the automatic channel method is applied and the channel to which the fixed channel method is applied are mixed. As mentioned above, in the automatic channel method, a finite number of channels are effectively utilized by searching for vacant channels, and by setting priorities, directing effects and sounds with high importance are given priority and output. Is possible. On the other hand, the fixed channel method is applied when the sound is continuously output as in BGM, or when the sound is preferentially output in order to notify a game machine failure or fraudulent activity. In this way, by applying a channel method suitable for the characteristics and application of sound, each channel can be effectively used, and further, appropriate control can be performed according to the sound output situation. For example, in the control of outputting BGM, the sound may be output to a pre-assigned channel regardless of the gaming state, and in the control of outputting an alarm sound, the designated channel is specified without searching for an empty channel. The sound may be output directly to. On the other hand, in the automatic channel system, as described above, it is possible to make the best use of the vacant channels and to preferentially output the sound having a high effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, by controlling the volume of each effect sound effect (channel), it is possible to emphasize and execute the effect having a high priority. In addition, it is possible to continue the effect while being executed while lowering the volume without interruption. At this time, it is possible to return the volume to the original volume as long as the previously executed low-priority effect continues even after the high-priority effect is completed. Further, as described in the embodiment, the effect of the specific effect can be emphasized by stopping the other effects and executing the specific effect independently. In this way, in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Here, the sound source IC used for playing sound effects and BGM is also used for driving the vibration speaker 354 described above. By giving sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354, the effect operation unit 301 is vibrated.

Since the purpose of providing the sound information from the sound source IC to the vibration speaker 354 is to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, the channel may be set each time the effect that operates the effect operation unit 301 appears. Then, although the sound information is the same, it is set as a fixed channel and assigned to a channel dedicated to the vibration speaker in order to avoid confusion due to the nature of the sound information such as sound effects and BGM that actually emits sound.

Further, as the sound information of the sound ROM to be referred to, as described above, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz is changed (sweep) from 38 Hz to 42 Hz in 1 Hz units for each cycle of about 8 times per second. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sound ROM as sound information to be input again after 1 second.
Further, by controlling the volume as described above, the volume is increased and emphasized for the production having a high priority, but the strength of the vibration is the same as the volume level, 40 Hz ± 2 Hz. By increasing or decreasing the amplitude of the sine wave of, the strength is adjusted, and the vibration is gradually strengthened or weakened to replace it with the strength of the vibration in the same way as adjusting the volume of the sound. I also use it.

Although the sound source IC has been expressed as a single device having only that function, a device having a function corresponding to the sound source IC built into the VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600 in the effect display control unit. Even in such a case, it is possible to control the vibration as long as the sound can be controlled in the same manner as described above. In such a case, the sound ROM and the image ROM may be hybridized, or the same device may be configured to store information used in each in advance. Further, the CPU and the control ROM that control them may also be configured by the same device.

[15-2. Modification example of sound control in which fixed channel method and automatic channel method are mixed]
In the sound control method described above, the number of channels for which the automatic channel method is set and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set are preset numbers, but in this modification, the automatic channel method is used. A modified example in which the number of set channels and the number of channels for which the fixed channel method is set is variable will be described.

[Production example]
When the number of channels is variable, for example, there is a case where it is desired to temporarily output more sounds of the same type than the number of channels to which the same type of sound can be assigned. For example, in the case of a gaming machine capable of performing an effect including a plurality of scenes, the screen is divided into a plurality of screens (for example, divided into 9), and different scenes are displayed on each of the divided screens. At that time, it is conceivable to output BGM corresponding to each scene. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a screen configuration example of the effect in the modified example of the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 199 is a notice effect in the latter half fluctuation after the reach occurs.

In this modification, the display screen is divided into nine, and an effect of displaying a different scene on each screen (multi-screen effect) is executed. Then, any one of the scenes is selected, and the effect corresponding to the selected scene is executed. At this time, BGM (9 types) of each scene is output at the same time. The scene may be selected by lottery or by the player.

The gaming machine of this modified example uses 32 channels in sound source control, as in the above-described embodiment. Also, the default channel allocation is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 193. Therefore, it is possible to output four types (8 channels) of BGM at the maximum at the same time. However, in the multi-screen effect in this modified example, it is necessary to output nine types of BGM at the same time. Therefore, in this modification, the channels for outputting BGM are reassigned, and the arrangement of the channels is reorganized.

[15-2-2. Channel layout]
FIG. 200 is a diagram showing an example of a playback channel configuration table in sound source control in a modified example of the present embodiment, (A) shows a default configuration, and (B) shows a configuration at the time of executing a multi-screen effect. The default configuration of FIG. 200 (A) is similar to the arrangement shown in FIG. 193, as described above.

In this modification, when the multi-screen effect is started, the arrangement of the channels shown in FIG. 200 (A) is changed to the arrangement shown in FIG. 148 (B). Specifically, fixed channel type channels for outputting BGM are added (channels 8 to 17), and the number of channels that have adopted the automatic channel method assigned to AUTO group 1 is reduced. This is because it is difficult for the player to recognize even if a different advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the multi-screen effect.

After the start of the multi-screen effect, all the BGM corresponding to each scene is played while all the scenes are displayed. At this time, if all the BGM is output at a normal volume, the volume becomes too loud, so the volume is output in a state where the volume is lower than usual. Then, when a scene is selected, a notice effect (second half notice) based on the selected scene is executed, the BGM volume of the selected scene is set to the normal volume, and the playback of other BGM is ended. .. When the player selects a scene, for example, the BGM of the selected scene is set to another BGM until the screen divided by the operation unit provided in the gaming machine is selected and the scene is determined. The volume may be made larger than the BGM of the scene, or the volume of the BGM of other scenes may be made smaller.

[15-2-3. Volume control]
FIG. 201 is a timing chart showing an example of the volume change of the sound effect in the latter half of the variation of the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) is the output timing of the effect sound effect, and (B) is the volume change of each effect sound effect. Is shown.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, at the timing when the execution of the multi-screen effect is determined (for example, at the start of fluctuation), the channel arrangement is changed from the default state (FIG. 200 (A)) to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 200 (B)). )) Is changed to. After the end of the first half fluctuation (time t11), a reach occurs and the second half fluctuation is started. After the start of the latter half fluctuation, the multi-screen effect is started (time t12). At this time, as shown in FIG. 199, the display screen is divided, different scenes are displayed in the divided display area, and BGM corresponding to each scene is output.

When the multi-screen effect is started, the BGM corresponding to the purpose of use of each channel after the change to the arrangement for the multi-screen effect (FIG. 200 (B)) is output. At this time, the volume V_1, which is smaller than the normal volume V_1, is output.

After that, when the scene for which the production is to be continued is selected (time t13), the volume of the BGM corresponding to the selected scene is set to the normal volume V_1, and the output of the other BGM is stopped. In the effect example shown in FIG. 201, scene 5 is selected, and the volume of BGM_0-5 is set to the normal volume V_1. At this time, the display area corresponding to the scene 5 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the latter half notice_5 corresponding to the scene 5 is executed.

After the multi-screen effect is completed, the channel for outputting BGM_0-5 may be changed from channels 10 and 11 to channels 2 and 3, and the channel arrangement may be returned to the default. When the output of BGM from channels 10 and 11 is continued as in this modification, the channels may be returned to the default arrangement at the start of the next fluctuation.

Further, the channel arrangement may be changed at the required timing. For example, in this modification, the arrangement of the channels may be changed immediately before the execution of the multi-screen effect is started, or may be changed at the start of the latter half variation.

Further, instead of changing the arrangement of the channels according to the content of the effect, the channel arrangement may be changed when the game state (for example, the effect mode such as the jackpot state, the time saving state, the background change, etc.) changes.

[effect]
With the above configuration, the number of fixed channels (corresponding to "variable fixed channels" in FIG. 192 (F)) that perform sound control by the fixed channel method and the automatic channels that perform sound control by the automatic channel method (FIG. The number (corresponding to the "variable AUTOch" of 192 (F)) can be flexibly changed according to the type and number of sounds to be reproduced. This makes it possible to make more notification sounds, BGM or sound effects playable depending on the situation, for example, to output more types of notification sounds in a situation where the game is not played. It is possible to take flexible measures such as increasing the number of BGM and sound effects that should be reproduced in the production by suppressing the number of reproducible notification sounds.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, an embodiment in which the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the operation unit base 320 constituting the effect operation unit 300 is shown, but with respect to the rotation operation unit 302 constituting the effect operation unit 300. The means for generating vibration may be further attached. An example of the modification is shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, an eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and is configured to be able to generate vibration under the control of the peripheral control unit 1511. ing. The vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b is transmitted from the rotation base 332 to the rotation operation unit 302, and the vibration is transmitted to the player who touches the rotation operation unit 302.

Since the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332, the player may rotate the rotation operation unit 302, or the rotation drive unit 340 may be driven by the control of the peripheral control unit 1511 to rotate the rotation operation unit 302. In this case, the eccentric motor 332b is also configured to rotate in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 in the circumferential direction.

The eccentric motor 332b is driven based on the result of a special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and is configured to transmit vibration to the player. ing. For example, it is preferable to vibrate the eccentric motor 332b so as to suggest the special lottery result in a state where the pattern sequence composed of a plurality of patterns is variably displayed as the effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to raise the expectation for the special lottery result for the player who feels the vibration of the eccentric motor 332b.

The rotation drive unit 340 is provided with a rotation base initial position detection sensor, and is configured to detect whether or not the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 or the rotation drive unit 340 is driven by the peripheral control unit 1511 to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 moves by a predetermined amount from the initial position. It becomes.

Therefore, at a predetermined timing, the rotation base initial position detection sensor determines whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, and if the rotation operation unit 302 is not located at the initial position, the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position. Control is performed. When the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, the eccentric motor 332b has the frontmost side (hereinafter, the innermost position of the rotation operation unit 302 is 0 degrees, the right side position is 90 degrees, and the frontmost position is 180 degrees. The position of the rotation operation unit 302 and the eccentric motor 332b will be described with the left side position set to 270 degrees).

Further, as a predetermined timing for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position, the effect display device 1600 stops the display of the pattern sequence consisting of a plurality of patterns as the effect image suggesting the special lottery result, and then the next variation. The timing before the display is started, the timing when the advantageous gaming state is generated according to the special lottery result, and the effect display device 1600 displays the variable display of the pattern sequence consisting of a plurality of patterns as the effect image suggesting the special lottery result. After the game is stopped, the game ball B is not accepted into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and the timing when the demo screen is displayed, the predetermined time (specifically, 5 minutes), the ball launcher 540. It is preferable to set the timing when it is determined that the game ball B is not driven by the player and the player is not playing the game. With such a configuration, the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position at a predetermined timing, and the player who puts his / her hand on the front side of the rotation operation unit 302 or the player who presses the pressing operation unit 303 On the other hand, the vibration transmitted from the eccentric motor 332b can be efficiently transmitted.

Further, since the position of the rotation operation unit 302 is controlled so that the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position, even if the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 with his / her hand on the rotation operation unit 302, the game Since the eccentric motor 332b also moves according to the movement of the player's hand, it is possible to efficiently transmit the vibration to the player's palm.

An example of controlling the rotation operation unit 302 to return to the initial position has been shown, but when the control to return to the initial position is performed, the player is notified that the control to return to the initial position is being performed. Is desirable. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays that the control for returning to the initial position is being performed, and the main body frame speaker 622 outputs a voice indicating that the control for returning to the initial position is being performed. It is good to configure as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands that the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is some kind of effect related to the special lottery result.

Although an example of controlling the rotation operation unit 302 to return to the initial position has been shown, the rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to be visible at the initial position. For example, when the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, a mark indicating that the rotation operation unit 302 is on the front side may be provided at a portion on the front side (180 degree position) of the rotation operation unit 302. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is properly performed without performing work such as disassembly.

Further, when the rotation operation unit 302 is located at the initial position, the decoration of the decoration unit 335b provided on the front side (180 degree position) of the rotation operation unit 302 is combined with the decoration of the decoration unit 335b provided on another portion. It may be different. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the control for returning the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position is properly performed without performing work such as disassembly. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation that gives the player a sense of aesthetic discomfort.

An embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is located on the front side (180 degree position) when the rotation operation unit 302 is controlled to return to the initial position is shown, but the eccentric motor 332b is on the left side (270 degree position). The initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 may be set so as to be located at a predetermined position on the front side (180 degree position). For example, the initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 is set so that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the front side (180 degree position), or the rotation operation is performed so that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the left front side (225 degree position). The initial position of the unit 302 may be set, or the initial position of the rotation operation unit 302 may be set so that the eccentric motor 332b is located on the left side (position of 270 degrees). With such a configuration, the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b can be efficiently transmitted to the player who operates the handle 182 with the right hand and the rotation operation unit 302 with the left hand. Is possible.

The rotation base initial position detection sensor detects whether or not the rotation operation unit 302 exists in the initial position, and the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the rotation drive unit 340 to return the rotation operation unit 302 to the initial position. Although the embodiment is shown, the rotation drive unit 340 may not be provided, and the rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position due to the physical structure. For example, a torsion spring is attached to the shaft of the operation ring transmission gear 350 to limit the rotation range of the operation ring transmission gear 350 to a predetermined range, and even if the operation ring transmission gear 350 rotates, the torsion spring is restored. The rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by force. With such a configuration, the player grips the rotation operation unit 302 and rotates it by a predetermined angle, and then the player releases the rotation operation unit 302, or the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the rotation drive unit 340. After the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, when the control of the rotation drive unit 340 by the peripheral control unit 1511 ends, the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position due to the restoring force of the torsion spring, and the eccentric motor 332b comes to be located on the front side.

Although the embodiment in which the rotation operation unit 302 returns to the initial position by the physical structure using the torsion spring without providing the rotation drive unit 340 is shown, the control by the rotation drive unit 340 and the physical structure using the torsion spring are shown. The rotation operation unit 302 may be configured to return to the initial position by both of the above structures.

The rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the rotation base 332 so as to move with a play of about several degrees in the rotation direction. With such a configuration, when vibration is generated by the eccentric motor 332b mounted on the rotation base 332, the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved in small steps in the rotation direction, and the vibration can be generated. It is possible to enhance the effect of the generation.

Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotation base 332 is shown, the eccentric motor 332b may be mounted on the inner surface of the member that the player directly touches. Specifically, the eccentric motor 332b may be configured to be directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335. Although the example in which the eccentric motor 332b is directly attached to the inner surface of the ring outer upper cover 335 is shown, it may be configured to be attached directly to the inner surface of the ring outer lower cover 336 or the ring inner cover 337. With such a configuration, the vibration generated by the eccentric motor 332b can be transmitted to the player more efficiently.

In addition to providing the vibration speaker 354 on the bottom wall of the main body 321, an embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is provided in the rotation operation unit 302 is shown. With such a configuration, it is possible to transmit vibration to the player by different vibration modes. On the other hand, the vibration speaker 354 provided on the bottom wall of the main body 321 may be eliminated, and vibration may be generated in the effect operation unit 300 only by the eccentric motor 332b provided in the effect operation ring 330.

The harness that supplies power to the eccentric motor 332b is drawn downward from the rotation base 332 and is connected to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 via the through hole 331c provided in the ring mounting base 331. Further, the eccentric motor 332b is composed of a metal case on the outside, and a ground wire is drawn out from the metal case, and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is passed through the through hole 331c like the harness. It is connected to the. With such a configuration, the rotatable angle of the rotation operation unit 302 is limited to a predetermined range (for example, a range of about 20 to 30 degrees to the left and right from the initial position) depending on the length of the harness and the ground wire. The Rukoto.

Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are electrically connected by a harness and a ground wire is shown, electricity that exchanges signals and currents between the moving side and the fixed side like a slip ring is shown. A mechanism may be used to electrically connect the eccentric motor 332b provided on the moving side and the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 provided on the fixed side. With such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the limitation of the rotatable angle of the rotation operation unit 302.

As shown in FIG. 55, a plurality of (specifically, 18) decorative portions 335b are attached to the ring outer upper cover 335. Specifically, a plurality of (specifically, 18) decorative portions 335b are inserted from above into the penetrating portion provided so as to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335. ing. Further, the decorative portion 335b is fixed to the penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a by the locking claws provided on the decorative portion 335b. The decorative portion 335b is made of synthetic resin, and the entire surface thereof is plated with a conductive metal. A ground wire is connected to the decorative portion 335b inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and this ground wire is pulled out from the rotation base 332 and finally passed through a through hole 331c provided in the ring mounting base 331. It is screwed to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is provided on the main body frame base unit 500. It is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in 510. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a ground wire 5592 connected to the connector CN14 of the ground circuit board 559 is screwed to a predetermined position of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. .. The door frame reinforcing unit 110, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122, the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are each made of metal, and the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame are also made of metal. It is electrically connected to the reinforcing frame 530 by a ground wire. With such a configuration, from the decorative portion 335b which is attached to the surface of the rotation operation portion 302 and whose surface is plated, the ground wire and door frame reinforcement provided inside the ring outer upper cover 335. Through the unit 110, it is possible to finally remove the static electricity possessed by the player to the ground circuit board 559. The ground wire from the decorative portion 335b may also be electrically connected by using an electric mechanism that exchanges signals and currents between the moving side and the fixed side, such as a slip ring.

An embodiment in which a locking claw is provided on the decorative portion 335b and the decorative portion 335b is inserted from above into the penetrating portion provided so as to penetrate the outer upper surface portion 335a to fix the decorative portion 335b has been shown. Instead of fixing with a claw, the decorative portion 335b may be screwed to the ring outer upper cover 335 from the inside with a metal screw to fix the decorative portion 335b. Further, when screwing, it may be configured to be fastened together with the ground wire connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110.

Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of synthetic resin and the entire surface is plated, the portion to be plated does not have to be the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b, and at least the outer cover 335 of the ring The part that the player touches when the decorative part 335b is inserted into the penetrating part provided on the outer upper surface part 335a, the part where the ground wire is connected inside the ring outer upper cover 335, and those parts are electrically connected. It suffices if the connecting part is plated. Further, although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is formed of synthetic resin is shown, the entire decorative portion 335b may be formed of a conductive metal. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect the part touched by the player and the part where the ground wire is connected without plating the entire surface of the decorative portion 335b, and the plating process can be performed. It can be simplified.

A plurality (specifically, 18) of the decorative portions 335b are fixed to the outer upper surface portion 335a, and the ground wire is connected to one of the decorative portions 335b. .. In this case, the ground wire is pulled out at a predetermined decorative portion 335b provided in the range from the front side (180 degree position) to the left side (270 degree position) when the eccentric motor 332b is in the initial position. There is. With such a configuration, the decorative portion 335b for pulling out the ground wire is present at a position where the player can easily come into contact with the ground wire, so that the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

Although the embodiment configured to connect the ground wire to the decorative portion 335b of No. 1 is shown, the ground wire is connected to a plurality of decorative portions 335b, each ground wire is pulled out from the rotating base 332, and the ring mounting base 331 is used. It may be configured to be connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 through the through hole 331c provided in the door frame. Alternatively, inside the outer upper surface portion 335a, a part of the ground wire is omitted by electrically connecting between the decorative portions 335b by wiring, and the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit are provided by at least one ground wire. It may be configured to be electrically connected to 110. As the decorative portion 335b to be electrically connected, when the eccentric motor 332b is located at the initial position (for example, the position of 180 degrees), the rotation operation portion 302 is located from the front side (180 degree position) to the left side (270 degree position). A plurality of (specifically 6) decorative portions 335b provided in the above may be the target, or all (specifically 18) decorative portions 335b provided in the rotation operation unit 302 may be the target. With such a configuration, even if the player touches any part of the rotation operation unit 302, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b is attached from the outside to the penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a is shown, the decorative portion 335b is exposed from the penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a. In the penetrating portion provided on the outer upper surface portion 335a, the decorative portion 335b may be attached so as to penetrate from the inside to the outside. Further, a plurality of decorative portions 335b are integrally formed, and by attaching the decorative portion 335b from the inside of the outer upper surface portion 335a, each of the plurality of decorative portions 335b is exposed in the plurality of penetrating portions. May be good. Further, it is preferable to perform plating treatment on the entire surface of the plurality of decorative portions 335b formed integrally. Further, the door frame reinforcing unit 110 may be electrically connected to the plurality of decorative portions 335b integrally formed by one ground wire. In this way, when the plurality of decorative portions 335b are integrally formed and the entire surface thereof is plated, any of the plurality of decorative portions 335b existing at distant positions is used. When the player touches the 335b, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed.

An embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are directly electrically connected by a ground wire has been shown, but in a part thereof, the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are connected via other members. It may be connected electrically. For example, a reinforcing metal plate for reinforcing the rotation operation unit 302 is arranged in the rotation operation unit 302, and the decorative portion 335b and the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are electrically connected via the metal plate. You may.

Although the embodiment in which the eccentric motor 332b is mounted on the rotary base 332 is shown, the eccentric motor 332b may be mounted on the ring mounting base 331. The eccentric motor 332b is located on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 at a predetermined position (for example, 180 degree position, 225 degree position, 270 degree position) from the foremost side (180 degree position) to the left side (270 degree position). It is good to attach it to at least one place). With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently transmit vibration to a player who operates the pressing operation unit 303 or plays a game while touching the effect operation unit 300. .. Further, even when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the vibration felt by the player is weakened.

The harness and ground wire from the eccentric motor 332b are connected to the effect operation ring decorative board 352, and are electrically connected to the circuit ground of the circuit on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 via a capacitor, a coil, or the like. Further, the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation unit relay substrate 392 via a harness and a ground wire. Further, the operation unit relay board 392 has a role of relaying a signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, and the signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 drives the eccentric motor 332b. Is input to the control circuit that lights and blinks the LED, and is transmitted by relaying the operation unit relay board 392 to drive control of the eccentric motor 332b and emit light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the effect operation ring decorative board 352. The decoration is done. On the other hand, the ground wire drawn from the operation unit relay board 392 is connected to the dish unit relay board 214. The ground wire drawn from the dish unit relay board 214 is connected to the power supply board 630, and finally is connected to the connector CN15 of the ground circuit board 559 by the ground wire 5593. With such a configuration, even if electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge, for example, tries to jump into the eccentric motor 332b, the noise can be removed.

Although the embodiment in which the ground wire drawn from the decorative portion 335b provided in the effect operation unit 300 is finally connected to the earth circuit board 559 via the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is shown, the effect operation unit 300 is dish-decorated. When attached to the unit 250, the ground wire on the effect operation unit 300 side and the reinforcing sheet metal provided on the dish decoration unit 250 side may be electrically connected. For example, the ground wire drawn from the decorative portion 335b is screwed together with a metal leaf spring at a predetermined position of the effect operation unit 300, and the plate decoration unit 250 is provided with a reinforcing sheet metal for reinforcing the plate decoration unit 250. When the operation unit 300 is attached to the dish decoration unit 250, the metal leaf spring provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the reinforcing sheet metal provided in the dish decoration unit 250 are configured to be in electrical contact with each other. However, the reinforcing sheet metal provided on the plate decoration unit 250 and the door frame reinforcing unit 110 may be connected by a ground wire. With such a configuration, it is possible to electrically connect the ground wire only by attaching the effect operation unit 300 to the dish decoration unit 250.

Although the embodiment in which the decorative portion 335b provided on the effect operation unit 300 is connected to the ground circuit board 559 via a ground wire or the like is shown, the entire upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin and is pulled out from the upper plate 201. The ground wire may be connected to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and finally connected to the ground circuit board 559 by the ground wire 5592. Although an example in which the entire upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin is shown, only the bottom wall portion of the upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin, and the standing wall surrounding the upper plate 201 is formed of a non-conductive resin. You may. Further, instead of the conductive resin, the entire upper plate 201 or the bottom wall may be formed by a conductive metal component. With such a configuration, the static electricity accumulated in the game ball and the static electricity possessed by the player can be discharged to the ground circuit board 559 via the upper plate 201. Although an example in which the upper plate 201 is conductive has been shown, the same configuration as that of the upper plate 201 may be adopted for the lower plate 202.

FIG. 52 shows an embodiment in which the board box 391 for accommodating the operation unit relay board 392 is mounted behind the operation unit base 320, but the board box 391 is mounted on the side (right side or left side) of the operation unit base 320. It may be configured to be installed in an upright state. In this case, it is preferable to provide the opening for connecting the connector provided in the board box 391 so as not to face the operation unit base 320 side. For example, when the board box 391 is mounted upright on the right side of the operation unit base 320, it may be mounted so that the connector connection opening provided in the board box 391 faces the right side. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the size of the gaming machine 1 from increasing in the front-rear direction. Further, even if the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the liquid flows down into the substrate box 391.

FIG. 52 shows an embodiment in which the board box 391 for accommodating the operation unit relay board 392 is attached to the rear of the operation unit base 320, but the connector is connected on the side (right side or left side) of the operation unit base 320. The board box 391 may be mounted in a horizontal state so that the opening for the board faces upward. Further, the opening for connecting the connector may be configured to be provided with a vertical wall portion that stands upright over the entire circumference of the opening. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the substrate box 391 from the front-rear direction or the left-right direction.

Further, when the opening for connecting the connector is provided in the horizontal board box 391 as described above, the opening may be provided in a portion of the upper surface of the board box 391 away from the operation unit base 320. Good. For example, when the board box 391 is mounted horizontally on the right side of the operation unit base 320, an opening for connecting a connector may be provided at a position on the right side of the center on the upper surface of the board box 391. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the substrate box 391.

FIG. 52 shows an example in which the operation unit relay board 392 is housed in the box-shaped board box 391 and arranged behind the operation unit base 320, but the operation unit relay board 392 is not housed in the board box 391. May be good. For example, with respect to one surface of the rectangular parallelepiped substrate box 391, it is preferable to provide a substrate mounting portion having a shape in which the surface is deleted and opened. In this case, the board mounting portion has a shape in which four standing walls are upright from the four sides of the surface facing the deleted surface, and the operation unit relay board 392 is mounted on the surface facing the deleted surface. When such a board mounting portion is provided in the effect operation unit 300 and the operation unit relay board 392 is mounted on the board mounting portion so that the mounting surface of the connector on the operation unit relay board 392 is located on the open surface. Good. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector on the operation unit relay board 392 and the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 are covered with the board mounting portion, and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392. Can be suppressed. Further, on the connector mounting surface, it is possible to easily attach / detach the wiring to / from the connector. In addition, although the example in which the board mounting portion has a rectangular shape and the four standing walls are upright is shown, the board mounting portion may have a shape in which the operation unit relay board 392 can be mounted, and the standing walls may also be mounted. It suffices that a plurality of surfaces are upright so as to surround the operation unit relay board 392. Further, the board mounting portion may be a separate body from the operation unit base 320 such as the board box 391, or may be formed integrally with the operation unit base 320.

Further, it is preferable to provide the board mounting portion so that the surface in the open state is located on the opposite side to the operation portion base 320. For example, when the board mounting portion is mounted upright on the right side of the operation unit base 320, it may be mounted so that the open surface faces the right side. With such a configuration, the non-mounting surface of the connector on the operation unit relay board 392 and the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 are covered with the board mounting portion, and the liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392. Can be suppressed. Although the example in which the board mounting portion is mounted upright on the right side of the operation unit base 320 is shown, the board mounting portion may be mounted on the left side, the front side, the rear side, and the lower side of the operation unit base 320.

Further, the board mounting portion may be provided in a horizontal state so that the open surface faces upward. In this case, it is desirable that the position where the board mounting portion is provided is a position horizontally separated from the operation portion base 320. With such a configuration, the board mounting portion that covers the side surface of the operation unit relay board 392 becomes a vertical wall shape, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which liquid flows down to the operation unit relay board 392 from the front-back and left-right directions. Is possible.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is configured to be electrically connected to the operation unit relay substrate 392 via a harness and a ground wire (hereinafter, both are collectively referred to as "wiring"), but upward. When the effect operation ring decorative board 352 provided and the operation unit relay board 392 provided below are simply connected, when the liquid enters the effect operation unit 300 from above, the liquid flows down along the wiring. , There is a risk of flowing into the operation unit relay board 392. Therefore, when connecting the wiring to the operation unit relay board 392, it is desirable to provide a structure for suppressing the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 along the wiring.

For example, after the wiring from the operation ring decorative board 352 passes through a position lower than the lower end of the operation unit relay board 392, the wiring is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the wiring is connected to the operation unit relay board 392. It is good. With such a configuration, the operation unit relay board 392 is located at a position higher than the lowest position of the wiring, so that the liquid does not enter the operation unit relay board 392 along the wiring. It becomes possible to do.

Further, after attaching the wiring to the operation unit base 320 so that the wiring from the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 faces downward, the wiring is once attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face upward, and then the operation is performed so as to face downward again. After attaching the wiring to the unit base 320, it may be configured to be connected to the operation unit relay board 392. At this time, it is preferable to configure the position so that the position where the wiring changes the direction upward and the position of the operation unit relay board 392 are separated in the horizontal direction so as not to overlap in a plan view. With such a configuration, even if the liquid travels through the wiring, the liquid falls downward at the position where the direction is changed so that the wiring goes upward, and it becomes difficult for the liquid to be transmitted to the wiring from that point onward. , It is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 along the wiring. With such a configuration, the operation unit relay board 392 can be mounted at a position lower than the lowest position of the wiring. Further, instead of attaching the wiring to the operation unit base 320 so as to once face upward, the wiring may be configured to be attached in the horizontal direction. Even with such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the liquid to be transmitted first in the portion where the wiring is in the horizontal direction, and it is possible to prevent the liquid from entering the operation unit relay board 392 through the wiring.

In this way, in the wiring path for electrically connecting the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392, a liquid that propagates through the wiring is provided by providing a portion that is convex downward at at least one point. It is possible to deter the movement of.

Further, when attaching the downward wiring to the operation unit base 320, it is preferable to attach it using a binding band. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the liquid flowing down the wiring from moving downward due to the binding band wound in the circumferential direction of the wiring.

Production Operation ring An example of suppressing the movement of liquid by providing a downwardly convex portion or using a binding band in the wiring path for electrically connecting the decorative substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392. However, it is assumed that the liquid will fall directly below the part of the wiring that is convex downward or the part that uses the binding band. Therefore, a portion of the wiring that is convex downward or a portion that uses a binding band is arranged so that the lower cover 311 of the unit is located directly below, and a portion of the wiring that is convex downward or a portion that uses a binding band is used. When the liquid falls from the unit, the liquid may be directly dropped on the unit lower cover 311. Although the embodiment in which the liquid falls directly on the unit lower cover 311 is shown, it is sufficient that the liquid does not fall directly on an article that can be affected by the liquid, such as electric parts such as motors and LEDs, wiring, etc. provided in the effect unit 300. For example, the wiring may be attached so that the liquid falls directly on the bottom wall 321a of the main body 321.

Production Operation ring In the wiring path that electrically connects the decorative substrate 352 and the operation unit relay substrate 392, a downwardly convex portion is provided or a binding band is used to suppress the movement of the liquid. Although the morphology is shown, such a method may be used in other places where the ingress of liquid is expected. For example, such a configuration is adopted in the harness connecting the second rotation detection sensor 348 and the operation unit relay board 392, or the harness or ground wire connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the dish unit relay board 214. You may.

Further, a cushioning member may be arranged so that the impact is gently transmitted at any position between the operation unit relay board 392 and the vibration speaker 354 or between the operation unit relay board 392 and the eccentric motor 332b. For example, when the substrate box 391 is attached to the rear of the operation unit base 320, the substrate box 391 may be attached to the operation unit base 320 via an elastic member made of synthetic rubber. With such a configuration, the vibration from the vibration speaker 354 and the eccentric motor 332b is elastically transmitted to the operation unit relay board 392 housed in the board box 391, and is mounted on the operation unit relay board 392. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the electrical / electronic components are damaged or stress is concentrated on the solder portion where the electrical / electronic components are attached to the operation unit relay board 392 and cracks are generated.

Further, the operation unit relay board 392 relays the signal from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. However, the microcomputer and ROM are mounted on the operation unit relay board 392 and transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. Based on the command, the vibration speaker 354 provided in the effect operation unit 300, the eccentric motor 322b, the LED mounted on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the like may be controlled.

FIG. 209 (a) is a plan view showing a modified example of the member provided on the base portion 221 of the ball lending operation unit 220. The upper plate ball removal button 222 is not shown. FIG. 209 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 209 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 209 (a).

A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 having translucency is attached to the base portion 221 from below. The entire circumference of the ball lending operation base 223 is formed in a flange shape, and is attached to the base portion 221 by adhesion or screws. .. In addition, two openings are provided on the front side of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button 224 formed in a circular shape and the return button 225 formed in a triangular shape are respectively provided from the two openings. It is exposed. Further, a ball lending display unit 226 is provided below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223.

The ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 are mounted on the ball lending board 227. Further, the ball rental board 227 is attached to the ball rental board case 228 from above. Further, the ball lending board case 228 is attached to the base portion 221 from below, whereby the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are exposed from the openings provided in the ball lending operation base 223 and the balls are exposed. The rental display unit 226 is configured to be located below the rear of the ball rental operation base 223.

The ball lending button 224 includes a ball lending button pressing portion 224a, a ball lending button housing portion 224b, a ball lending button spring 224c, and a ball lending button micro switch 224d. During the non-pressing operation, the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is in a state of being urged upward by the ball lending button spring 224c. When the player presses the ball lending button pressing unit 224a, the ball lending button micro switch 224d detects the pressing operation by the player, and a signal is sent via the ball lending board 227 to obtain a predetermined number of balls. The game ball B is supplied to the upper plate 201.

The return button 225 includes a return button pressing portion 225a, a return button housing portion 225b, a return button spring 225c, and a return button micro switch 225d. During the non-pressing operation, the return button pressing portion 225a is in a state of being urged upward by the return button spring 225c. When the player presses the return button pressing portion 225a, the return button microswitch 225d detects the pressing operation by the player, and a signal is sent via the ball lending board 227 to prepaid the ball lending machine. The card will be returned.

The ball rental display unit 226 includes a 7-segment LED 226a and a ball rental status display LED 226b. The 7-segment LED 226a and the ball rental status display LED 226b are mounted on the ball rental display board 226c, respectively, and function as the ball rental display unit 226 as a whole. Further, the ball rental display unit 226 is mounted on the ball rental board 227 and is driven by the ball rental board 227 so that the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball rental status display LED 226b are lit. The 7-segment LED 226a is provided with a display unit for three digits, and can display numbers and alphabets depending on how the seven segments are turned on and off. For example, it is possible to display the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine, and an error code indicating that the ball lending machine has failed depending on the lighting state. The ball lending status display LED 226b indicates the state of the ball lending machine, and when the ball lending is feasible, it is turned on by being driven by the ball lending board 227. It should be noted that the drive by the ball lending board 227 may cause the ball to blink at a low speed during ball lending or at a high speed during the return of the prepaid card. The display state of the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball lending status display LED 226b can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223. In driving the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball rental status display LED 226b, it is preferable to provide a drive circuit on the ball rental display unit 226 or the ball rental board 227 to drive the 7-segment LED 226a and the ball rental status display LED 226b.

Base portion 221 and ball lending operation base 223, ball lending button pressing portion 224a, ball lending button housing portion 224b, return button pressing portion 225a, and return button housing shown in FIGS. 209 (a) to 209 (c). The portion 225b and the ball rental substrate case 228 are made of a non-conductive synthetic resin. The ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a may be formed of a non-conductive elastic body. The ball rental button spring 224c and the return button spring 225c are made of a conductive metal such as stainless steel or brass. The ball rental board 227 is provided with a wiring pattern for electrically connecting the ball rental button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, the ball rental display unit 226, and the ball rental board 227 on the upper surface thereof.

In such a configuration, when a player having static electricity brings his fingertip close to the vicinity of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a in an attempt to start the game, a discharge is generated, and the generated high voltage pulse causes the ball lending operation unit 220 to move. There is a risk that electrical parts such as the ball rental button micro switch 224d, the return button micro switch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental status display LED 226b, and the ball rental board 227 may break down. In particular, LEDs have a low resistance to high voltage and are susceptible to discharge. In addition, static electricity may be generated in the player due to friction between the player and the clothes worn by the player not only at the start of the game but also during the game. Therefore, for example, when a player who is about to end the game brings his or her fingertip close to the return button pressing portion 225a, an electric discharge may occur, and in this case as well, the electric component may break down. Therefore, if the static electricity possessed by the player can be appropriately removed, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the ball lending operation unit 200 breaks down. The following is an example in which the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b are used as members for removing static electricity in the ball lending operation unit 200.

210 (a) and 210 (b) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 210 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 210 (a). The filled portion in the drawings of FIGS. 210 (a) to 210 (c) shows that it is a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the ground wire 229b.

In FIGS. 210 (a) and 210 (c), in the ball lending button 224, the entire ball lending button pressing portion 224a is formed of a conductive synthetic resin instead of the non-conductive synthetic resin, and one end of the ground wire 229b. Is shown as a modified example in which the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is attached to the bottom portion of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. In this example, the ball lending button pressing portion 224a functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is pulled out to the outside of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental button housing opening 224e and the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4. The other end is connected to. With such a configuration, the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed via the ball lending button pressing portion 224a (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b.

A thin plate-shaped non-conductive member is provided at least at one place between the bottom surface of the ball rental button pressing portion 224a and the upper portion of the ball rental button spring 224c, and between the lower portion of the ball rental button spring 224c and the upper surface of the ball rental substrate 227. It is desirable to insert it into an electrically insulated state. Alternatively, a non-conductive elastic body may be used instead of the ball lending button spring 224c. Further, at the portion where the bottom surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the ball lending button microswitch 224d are in contact with each other, at least one of the members is formed of a non-conductive member so as to be electrically insulated. It may be.

With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the game machine 1, the player's finger trying to press the ball lending button 224 comes into contact with the ball lending button pressing portion 224a, thereby causing the ball lending button. Since the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the pressing portion 224a (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d and the return button micro switch It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like included in the 225d ball rental display unit 226 fail.

FIG. 210 (b) shows a modified example in which the return button pressing portion 225a of the return button 225 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin instead of the non-conductive synthetic resin, and the return button pressing portion 225a functions as the conductive portion 229a. Is shown. By adopting the same structure as the example shown in the ball lending button 224, the return button 225 can also remove the static electricity possessed by the player. Both the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a may be configured to be the conductive portion 229a.

With such a configuration, when the finger of the player who is about to end the game in the game machine 1 comes into contact with the return button pressing portion 225a, the return button pressing portion 225a (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b are used. Since the static electricity of the player generated during the game is removed, a discharge occurs in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d, the return button micro switch 225d, and the ball lending display unit 226. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like provided in the above are out of order.

FIG. 211 (a) schematically shows a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 211 (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 211 (a). The filled portions in the drawings of FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b) indicate that the conductive portion 229a is made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the ground wire 229b.

In FIGS. 211 (a) and 211 (b), in the ball lending operation base 223, the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent conductive synthetic resin instead of the transparent non-conductive synthetic resin, and is grounded. A modified example in which one end of the wire 229b is attached to the bottom of the ball lending operation base 223 is shown. In this example, the ball lending operation base 223 functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is pulled out of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4.

With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the game machine 1, the player's finger trying to press the ball lending button 224 comes into contact with the ball lending operation base 223, thereby causing the ball lending operation base. Since the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the 223 (conductive portion 229a) and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d, the return button micro switch 225d, It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, or the like breaks down. Further, when the finger of the player who tried to end the game in the game machine 1 tries to press the return button pressing portion 225a, the finger of the player comes into contact with the ball lending operation base 223, and the same effect is obtained. It becomes possible to obtain.

An example was shown in which the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent conductive synthetic resin, but the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin, and the entire surface thereof is transparent and conductive. The conductive portion 229a may be formed by applying a paint. Alternatively, the entire ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a transparent non-conductive synthetic resin, and a predetermined portion on the front surface and the back surface of the ball lending operation base 223 is masked so that the ball lending display unit 226 can be visually recognized. The conductive portion 229a may be formed by vacuum-depositing aluminum on a portion other than the masked portion.

FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (c) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 212 (d) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 212 (b). The filled portion in the drawings of FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (d) shows that it is a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the ground wire 229b.

In FIGS. 212 (a) to 212 (d), an opening is provided in the ball lending operation base 223 made of a non-conductive synthetic resin, a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin is attached from below, and a ground wire 229b is attached. An example is shown in which one end of the conductive portion 229a is attached to the lower surface of the conductive portion 229a. FIG. 212 (a) shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is attached between the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225. FIG. 212 (b) shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a has a right-angled shape, and the conductive portion 229a is attached between the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225, and between the ball lending button 224 and the ball lending display unit 226. .. FIG. 212 (c) shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is attached between the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 and the ball lending display unit 226. The ground wire 229b is pulled out of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4.

With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the game machine 1, the finger of the player who tried to operate the ball lending button 224 is likely to move near the ball lending display unit 226 behind. Even if it becomes, since the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b, a discharge occurs in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d and the return button micro It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the switch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like break down.

213 (a) to 213 (d) and 214 (a) to 214 (c) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). .. Further, FIG. 213 (e) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 213 (c). The filled portions in the drawings of FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (e) and FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c) indicate that the conductive portion 229a is made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the conductive portion 229a or the ground wire 229b.

FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (d) show conductive paint around an opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on the ball lending operation base 223 formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin. This is a modified example in which the conductive portion 229a is provided by applying the above. FIG. 213 (a) is an example in which the conductive portion 229a is provided concentrically with respect to the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. FIG. 213 (b) shows an example in which the areas on the left side and the front side are widened in the conductive portion 229a provided concentrically. FIG. 213 (c) shows an example in which the concentric conductive portions 229a are provided only on the front half. FIG. 213 (d) shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a provided concentrically is divided into four parts of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left. As the conductive coating material, a colorless and transparent one may be used, or a colored one may be used.

FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (d) show how to provide the conductive portion 229a in a plan view. FIG. 213 (e) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 213 (c), but as shown by the thick line in the figure, from the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. , On the side wall of the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on the ball lending operation base 223, the bottom surface of the ball lending operation base 223, and the flange-shaped portion provided at the end of the ball lending operation base 223. The conductive portion 229a is formed by continuously applying the conductive coating material. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the lower surface of a flange-shaped portion provided at the end of the ball lending operation base 223 that functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is pulled out of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4.

With such a configuration, in order to start the game in the game machine 1, the finger of the player who tried to press the ball lending button 224 is provided around the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. Since the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b by contacting the ball lending operation base 223, a discharge is generated in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch 224d and the return button micro are used. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the switch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like break down.

FIG. 213 (b) shows a modified example in which the areas of the left side and the front side of the conductive portion 229a provided concentrically are widened. However, with such a configuration, when the fingers are brought closer from the front side or the left side. In addition, the probability that the player's finger comes into contact with the conductive portion 229a can be increased. FIG. 213 (c) is a modified example in which the conductive portion 229a is provided only on the front half. This is because, since the player generally tries to press the ball lending button 224 by moving his finger from the front side, it is not always necessary to provide the conductive portion 229a on the back half. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of paint constituting the conductive portion 229a. FIG. 213 (d) is a modified example in which the conductive paint is provided on a plurality of parts, but is a side wall of an opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a provided on the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It is desirable to apply the conductive paint so that the plurality of portions are electrically conductive at at least one of the flange-shaped portions provided on the bottom surface of the base 223 and the end portion of the ball lending operation base 223. With such a configuration, the degree of freedom regarding the shape of the conductive portion 229a can be increased. In particular, when a colored paint is used as the conductive paint, it is possible to achieve both design and conductivity.

FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (e) show an example in which the conductive paint is applied around the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a, but the return button pressing portion 225a has the same configuration. It may be adopted. FIG. 214A is a modified example in which the conductive paint is applied around the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a.

With such a configuration, the finger of the player who is about to end the game in the game machine 1 comes into contact with the conductive portion 229a provided around the return button pressing portion 225a, so that the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire are connected. Since the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the 229b, a discharge is generated in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button microswitch 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, and the ball lending display unit 226 have 7 segments. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, or the like breaks down.

In FIGS. 214 (b) and 214 (c), a conductive paint is applied to the ball lending operation base 223 so as to include both the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a to form the conductive portion 229a. This is a modified example. With such a configuration, there is a high possibility that the player's finger will come into contact with the conductive portion 229a regardless of which pressing portion is to be pressed. Therefore, FIGS. 213 (a) and 214 (a) show. Compared with the case where the conductive portion 229a is provided only around one of the pressing portions as in the above, the ball lending button micro switch 224d, the return button micro switch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball lending display unit 226, and the ball lending status display LED 226b, It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball rental board 227 or the like breaks down. In addition, the degree of freedom regarding the shape of the conductive portion 229a can be increased. In particular, when a colored paint is used as the conductive paint, it is possible to achieve both design and conductivity.

In FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (e) and FIGS. 214 (a) to 214 (c), the opening for exposing the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the opening for exposing the return button pressing portion 225a. Although an example of forming the conductive portion 229a by applying the conductive paint to the periphery is shown, the conductive portion 229a may be provided by a method other than applying the conductive paint. For example, the conductive portion 229a may be formed by bending a thin piece made of a metal such as aluminum and attaching it to the opening of the ball lending base 223. Further, a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin is formed in advance, and when the ball lending operation base 223 is molded from the synthetic resin, the ball lending operation base 223 and the conductive portion 229a are integrally molded by insert molding. You may.

FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b) schematically show the members in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 215 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 215 (b). The filled portion in the drawings of FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c) shows that it is a conductive portion 229a made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the conductive portion 229a or the ground wire 229b.

In FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), the conductive paint is applied around the opening for attaching the ball lending operation base 223 provided on the base portion 221 formed of the non-conductive synthetic resin. This is a modified example in which the conductive portion 229a is provided. FIG. 215 (a) shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is provided concentrically with respect to the ball lending operation base 223. FIG. 215 (b) shows an example in which the concentric conductive portions 229a are provided only on the front half. As the conductive coating material, a colorless and transparent one may be used, or a colored one may be used.

FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b) show how to provide the conductive portion 229a in a plan view. FIG. 215 (c) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 215 (b). As shown by the thick line in the figure, the base is viewed from the upper surface of the base portion 221. The conductive portion 229a is formed by continuously applying the conductive paint over the side wall of the opening for attaching the ball lending operation base 223 provided in the portion 221 and the bottom surface of the base portion 221. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the bottom surface of the base portion 221 that functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is pulled out of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4.

With such a configuration, in order to start or end the game in the game machine 1, the finger of the player who tried to press the ball lending button 224 or the return button 225 is provided around the ball lending operation base 223. By contacting the conductive portion 229a, the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b, so that a discharge is generated in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223, and the ball lending button micro switch It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the 7-segment LED 226a, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like included in the 224d, the return button microswitch 225d, and the ball rental display unit 226 are out of order.

In FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c), an example is shown in which the conductive portion 229a is formed by applying a conductive paint around the opening for attaching the ball lending operation base 223. The conductive portion 229a may be provided by a method other than applying the paint. For example, the conductive portion 229a may be formed by bending a thin piece made of a metal such as aluminum and attaching it to the opening of the base portion 221. Further, the conductive portion 229a made of a conductive synthetic resin may be formed in advance, and when the base portion 221 is molded from the synthetic resin, the base portion 221 and the conductive portion 229a may be integrally molded by insert molding.

FIG. 216 (a) schematically shows a member in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 shown in FIG. 209 (a). Further, FIG. 216 (b) schematically shows a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 216 (a). The filled portions in the drawings of FIGS. 216 (a) and 216 (b) indicate that the conductive portion 229a is made of a conductive member. Further, the portion indicated by the thick wire indicates that it is the ground wire 229b.

In FIGS. 216 (a) and 216 (b), the base portion 221 formed of the non-conductive synthetic resin is formed of the conductive synthetic resin so that the base portion 221 functions as the conductive portion 229a. This is an example. One end of the ground wire 229b is attached to the bottom surface of the base portion 221 that functions as the conductive portion 229a. The ground wire 229b is pulled out of the ball rental operation unit 220 through the ball rental board case opening 228a, and finally the other end is connected to the main body frame metal member provided in the main body frame 4.

With such a configuration, the finger or palm of the player who tried to press the ball lending button 224 or the return button 225 in order to start or end the game in the game machine 1 is the ball lending operation base 223. By contacting the conductive portion 229a provided in the surroundings, the static electricity possessed by the player is removed by the conductive portion 229a and the ground wire 229b, so that a discharge is generated in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 and the ball lending is performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the button micro switch 224d, the return button micro switch 225d, the 7-segment LED 226a provided in the ball rental display unit 226, the ball rental status display LED 226b, the ball rental board 227, and the like break down.

Further, when the upper plate 201 is formed of a conductive resin and the ground wire drawn from the upper plate 201 is finally connected to the ground circuit board 559, the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are connected. It may be configured to be electrically conductive and allow the static electricity of the player to flow from the base portion 221 to the upper plate 201. As a method of electrically conducting the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201, the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are connected by a ground wire, or the base portion 221 and the upper plate 201 are in direct contact with each other. It is good to do.

Up to this point, FIGS. 209 (a) to 216 (b) have been shown, and an example in which the static electricity possessed by the player can be removed by providing the conductive portion 229a in the vicinity of the ball lending operation base 223 has been shown. On the other hand, if the ball lending button 224 or the ball lending button 225 is accidentally pressed during the game, unnecessary ball lending is performed or the prepaid card is ejected. There is also the problem that Therefore, a modified example in consideration of solving such a problem is shown.

217 (a) to 217 (c) are views showing a modified example of FIG. 210 (c). FIG. 217 (a) shows an example in which the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is set to the same height as the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. Further, FIG. 217 (b) shows an example in which the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is lower than the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. In such an example, although the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is suppressed, the risk of failure of the electric component is increased from the viewpoint of removing the static electricity possessed by the player. FIG. 217 (c) shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin and functions as a conductive portion 229a. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of an erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a.

218 (a) to 218 (c) are views showing a modified example of FIG. 211 (b). In FIG. 218 (a), the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is set to the same height as the upper surface of the conductive ball lending operation base 223, and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a is set to the ball lending operation base 223. An example is shown in which the height is lower than the upper surface of. In FIG. 218 (b), the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation is formed into a downwardly convex spherical shape, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is set to the same height as the upper surface of the conductive ball lending operation base 223. An example is shown in which the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a has a spherical shape that is convex upward, and the central portion thereof has the same height as the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. In FIG. 218 (c), the heights of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a are not changed, and the entire peripheral edge of the ball lending operation base 223 is formed to be convex upward. An example is shown in which the height of the top of the portion is made higher than the height of the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a.

FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 212 (d). FIG. 219 shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is projected in a wall shape to a position higher than the upper surface of the ball lending operation base 223. Further, the height of the conductive portion 229a is higher than the height of the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a.

220 (a) and 220 (b) are views showing a modified example of FIG. 213 (e). FIG. 220A shows an opening in the ball lending operation base 223 where the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is exposed is extended upward in a tubular shape, and the height of the top thereof is higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. An example is shown. FIG. 220B shows an example in which the thickness of the entire ball lending operation base 223 is increased and the height of the upper surface thereof is made higher than the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a. In addition, an electric portion 229a is provided in each opening where the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is exposed. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a.

FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a modified example of FIG. 215 (c). FIG. 221 shows an example in which a semicircular convex portion having an upwardly convex cross section is continuously formed on the peripheral edge portion of the opening for exposing the ball lending operation base 223 in the base portion 221. The height of the top of the convex portion is higher than the height of the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. Further, a conductive portion 229a is provided on the convex portion provided on the base portion 221. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a.

222 (a) and 222 (b) are views showing a modified example of FIG. 216 (b). FIG. 222 (a) shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is attached to a tubular opening extending vertically downward provided in the conductive base portion 221. FIG. 222 (b) shows an example in which the conductive base portion 221 is provided with a tubular opening extending downward, and the opening is formed so as to shrink as it goes downward. The height of the upper surface of the base portion 221 is higher than the height of the upper surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a during the non-pressing operation and the upper surface of the return button pressing portion 225a during the non-pressing operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while preventing the occurrence of erroneous operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a and the return button pressing portion 225a.

In the example shown in FIG. 209 (a), the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 are arranged so as to fit in the circular ball lending operation base 223 when viewed in a plan view. However, a modified example of the arrangement and shape of the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 will be shown below. In the following modification, the technical idea of the conductive portion 229a shown in FIGS. 209 to 222 can be appropriately adopted.

FIG. 223 (a) shows an example in which the ball lending operation base 223 is a rectangle. FIG. 223 (b) shows an example in which the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are provided on the base portion 221. Further, an example is shown in which the conductive portion 229 is provided on the base portion 221 so as to be located between the ball lending display unit 226, the ball lending button 224, and the return button 225. As a method of providing the conductive portion 229a to the base portion 221, a mounting method as shown in FIG. 212 can be adopted. Although an example of attaching the conductive portion 229a as shown in FIG. 212 is shown, a method described in a drawing other than FIG. 212 may be adopted instead of such a method. This point is the same in the following modified examples. FIG. 223 (c) shows an example in which the shape of the return button 225 is the same as that of the ball lending button 224, and the size of the return button 225 is smaller than that of the ball lending button 224. The size of the ball lending button 224 may be the same as that of the return button 225, or may be smaller than that of the return button 225. FIG. 223 (d) shows an example in which the ball lending button 224, the conductive portion 229a, the ball lending display unit 226, and the return button 225 are arranged from the left in the horizontal direction. FIG. 223 (e) is a modified example of FIG. 223 (d), and shows an example in which the conductive portion 229a is also arranged between the ball lending display unit 226 and the return button 225. FIG. 223 (f) shows an example in which the ball lending button 224, the conductive portion 229a, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 are arranged horizontally from the left.

FIG. 224 (a) shows an example in which the ball lending display unit 226, the conductive unit 229a, the ball lending button 224, and the return button 225 are arranged from the left in the horizontal direction. In FIG. 224 (b), the ball lending display unit 226, the conductive unit 229a, the ball lending button 224, and the return button 225 are arranged horizontally from the left, and the conductive unit 229a is arranged in front of the ball lending display unit 226. This is an example of the above. FIG. 224 (c) shows an example in which the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are arranged on the left side, the ball lending display unit 226 is arranged on the right side, and the conductive portion 229a is arranged between them. FIG. 224 (d) shows an example in which the ball lending display unit 226 is arranged in the front, the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225 are arranged in the rear, and four conductive portions 229a are arranged around the ball lending display unit 226. It is a thing. Further, of the four conductive portions 229a, the two conductive portions 229a on the left side and the front side where the finger of the player's left hand is likely to approach are shown as an example in which the area is increased.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 223 (a) to 224 (d), the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the ball lending display unit 226 provided in the ball lending operation unit 220 are arranged. It is possible to remove the static electricity possessed by the player while increasing the degree of freedom in designing.

Although the example in which the ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the right side in front of the gaming machine is shown, it may be configured to be provided at another position in front of the gaming machine. For example, it may be configured to be provided at a position on the front side of the upper plate 201 provided on the left side of the gaming machine or at a position on the front side of the lower plate 202.

An example is shown in which the ball lending status display LED 226b is provided in the ball lending display unit 226 to display the ball lending status. However, a similar LED is provided in the ball lending button 224 and the ball lending button pressing unit 224a is colored or colorless and transparent. It may be formed of a synthetic resin, and may be configured to light an LED that has been turned off until then when a pressing operation is performed on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a or until the ball lending is completed. .. Further, the lighting mode of the LED may be different between the start of ball lending, the ball lending, and the ball lending end. In driving this LED, it is preferable to provide a drive circuit in the ball rental button 224 or on the ball rental board 227 to drive the LED.

With such a configuration, the game is that the pressing operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is properly accepted and the ball lending is started, the ball lending is performed normally, and the ball lending is completed. It becomes easier for people to recognize.

Although the example in which the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is formed of a transparent synthetic resin is shown, it may be formed of a translucent translucent synthetic resin. In this case, the ball lending button spring 224c and the ball lending button micro switch 224d are invisible or difficult to see from the player, so that the aesthetic appearance of the ball lending button 224 can be enhanced.

Further, as the lighting mode of the LED described above, a continuous (for example, about 2-3 seconds) lighting state, a fast blinking state, a slow blinking state, an extinguishing state, or the like may be adopted. Further, an LED capable of multicolor emission (white, red, green, blue, etc.) may be adopted as the LED, and the LED may be configured to emit light with a different emission color from the above lighting mode. For example, it is preferable that the LED is driven to emit light in a white and fast blinking state at the start of ball lending, and is driven to emit light in a blue continuous (for example, about 2-3 seconds) lighting state at the end of ball lending.

With such a configuration, the game is that the pressing operation on the ball lending button pressing portion 224a is properly accepted and the ball lending is started, the ball lending is performed normally, and the ball lending is completed. It becomes easier for people to recognize.

Although a modified example in which an LED or the like is provided in the ball lending button 224 is shown, the same configuration may be adopted in the return button 225. For example, the pressing operation on the return button pressing unit 225a was properly accepted and the prepaid card return processing was started, the prepaid card return processing was performed normally, and the prepaid card return processing was completed. , Each may be configured as shown by the lighting mode of the LED provided in the return button 225. With such a configuration, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the state of the return process.

An example in which a conductive synthetic resin, a conductive paint, or the like is used as the member forming the conductive portion 229a has been shown, but the conductive portion that constitutes the portion where the player is expected to come into contact with each of the examples. Instead of the member, another conductive member may be adopted. Examples of the conductive member include synthetic resins containing carbon fillers and metal powders, synthetic resins having aluminum vacuum vapor deposition treatment, plating treatment, and coating of conductive paint on the surface, carbon fillers and metal powders. An elastic body such as rubber or a metal such as stainless steel or brass may be used. In addition, when vacuum deposition treatment or metal is used, the surface thereof exhibits metallic luster, so that it is possible to enhance the design. Further, even when the conductive portion 229a is formed by using the colored conductive paint, if the non-conductive paint of the same color is applied to the portion not the conductive portion 229a, the conductivity is exhibited without deteriorating the design. It becomes possible to do.

For example, the entire surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin may be vacuum-deposited with aluminum, or the ball lending button pressing portion 224a may be formed of a synthetic resin containing a carbon filler. A colored or colorless conductive paint may be applied to the entire surface of the ball lending button pressing portion 224a formed of a non-conductive synthetic resin, or the ball lending button pressing portion 224a may be made of carbon filler or rubber containing metal powder. By forming the ball lending button pressing portion 224a from an elastic body or by forming the ball lending button pressing portion 224a from a metal such as stainless steel or brass, the lending button pressing portion 224a may be configured to function as the conductive portion 229a.

A modified example of adopting another conductive member is shown for the ball lending button pressing portion 224a, but other parts requiring conductivity (for example, base portion 221 and ball lending operation base 223, return button pressing portion 225a) have been shown. ), The above-mentioned conductive member may be adopted.

The above technical idea may be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine in which a gaming ball is enclosed in the gaming machine and the gaming ball circulates inside the gaming machine. An example is shown below. The ball rental display unit 226 is provided above the ball rental number display LED 7 segment LED 226a that displays the number of balls lent to the player. When the player operates the ball lending button 224 at the start of the game, the frequency displayed on the 7-segment LED 226a is subtracted from the existing frequency for the frequency corresponding to the number of rented balls, and the ball is rented instead. The number of rented balls displayed on the number of rented balls display LED is added to the existing number of rented balls and displayed by the number corresponding to the number of balls. During the game, the number of rented balls displayed on the number of rented balls display LED increases or decreases depending on the launch of the game balls or the winning of the game balls to a predetermined winning opening. When the player operates the ball lending button 224 at the end of the game, data indicating the number of balls lending displayed on the ball lending number display LED and the frequency displayed on the 7-segment LED 226a may be recorded on the prepaid card. The prepaid card is ejected from the inter-unit machine after being transmitted to the management device via the inter-unit machine. In such a configuration, by adopting the conductive portion 229a as described above, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as a failure of the ball rental number display LED.

The purpose is to protect the LED, which is an electronic element constituting each segment of the ball lending display unit 226 (7-segment LED 226a, ball lending status display LED 226b) arranged near the ball lending button 224 and the return button 225, from static electricity. Although the embodiment has been described, the above embodiment is applied to the LED mounted on the upper surface of the central button decorative substrate 376 in order to increase the player's motivation to play by emitting light when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed. It is possible. Further, the above embodiment can be applied not only to the ball rental display unit 226 and the central button decorative substrate 376, but also to the LEDs mounted on various substrates having a light emitting function provided in the gaming machine 1. is there.

Further, the drive circuit for driving the LED mounted on various boards having a light emitting function, the drive circuit for driving the vibration motor 332b provided for vibrating the effect operation unit 301, and the like are also used. , The above embodiment can be applied. The drive circuit is composed of an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements are integrated or an electronic circuit composed of a plurality of electronic elements, but an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements other than the drive circuit that need to be protected from static electricity are integrated. And the above embodiment can be applied to an electronic circuit composed of a plurality of electronic elements. Although an example of applying it to an IC in which a plurality of electronic elements are integrated or an electronic circuit composed of a plurality of electronic elements is shown, a single electronic element (for example, a transistor, a capacitor, a diode, a resistor, an LED, a fuse) is shown. It is possible to apply the above embodiment when mounting the above-mentioned embodiment on the substrate provided in the game machine 1.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the base unit 221, the ball lending operation base 223, the ball lending button 224, the return button 225, and the like are the conductive parts 229a, but the volume / light amount adjustment buttons and the input in the vertical / horizontal directions are It is also possible to provide a possible cross-shaped direction input key and an effect operation button to be operated at the time of the effect while the symbol is changing, and apply the above-mentioned technical idea regarding static electricity countermeasures to these.

Each technical matter in any embodiment may be applied to other embodiments as an embodiment.

In the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if it is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. At best, even in this case, the same effect as the above-mentioned effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 10 Outer frame left assembly 11 Outer frame left member 11a Recess 11b Protruding part 11c Cavity part 12 Upper left connecting member 12a Horizontal fixing part 12b Upper and horizontal fixing Part 12c Lower horizontal fixing part 13 Lower left connecting member 13a Horizontal fixing part 13b Upper horizontal fixing part 13c Lower horizontal fixing part 13d Abutment part 20 Outer frame right assembly 21 Outer frame right member 21a Recess 21b Protruding part 21c Cavity part 22 Upper right Connecting member 22a Horizontal fixing part 22b Upper horizontal fixing part 22c Lower horizontal fixing part 23 Lower right connecting member 23a Horizontal fixing part 23b Upper horizontal fixing part 23c Lower horizontal fixing part 23d Contact part 24 Upper hinge member 24a Mounting part 24b Hinging piece Part 25 Lower hinge member 25a Mounting part 25b Hinging piece 25c Insertion port 30 Outer frame upper member 30a Notch 30b Mounting step 40 Outer frame lower assembly 40a Curtain plate internal space 41 Outer frame lower member 41a Notch 41b Recess 42 Front member of curtain plate 42a Opening 43a Rear member of curtain plate 43a Connection cylinder 43b Rib 44 Ball bite prevention mechanism 44a Mounting part 44b First discharge port 44c Second discharge port 44d Standing wall part 44e Upper end protrusion 45 Guide member 50 Outer frame Upper hinge assembly 51 Outer frame Upper hinge member 51a Upper fixing part 51b Front extension part 51c Bearing groove 51d Horizontal fixing part 51e Edge wall part 52 Lock member 52a Lock body 52b Operation piece 52c Elastic part 52d Mounting hole 53 Mounting screw 60 Outer frame lower hinge member 60a Horizontal part 60b Standing up 60c Outer frame lower hinge pin 60d Discharge hole

100 Door frame base unit 101 Door frame base 101a Door window 101b Handle mounting seat surface 101c Insertion recess 101d Cylinder insertion hole 101e Ball feeding opening 101f Lower plate ball passage 101g Upper plate ball passage 101h Glass unit mounting 101i Slit 101j Through hole 102 Handle mounting part 102a Cylinder part 102b Flange part 102c Protrusion 102d Reinforcing rib 103 Speaker duct 103a Cable holder 104 Door frame main relay board 105 Door frame secondary relay board 106 Door rear relay board 107 Door frame relay board cover 108 Door Rear relay board cover 109 Cable cover 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame reinforcement unit 111 Left reinforcement frame 112 Right reinforcement frame 113 Top reinforcement frame 114 Intermediate reinforcement frame 114a Notch 114b Penetration part 115 Cylinder mounting frame 116 Hook member 120 Door Frame hinge assembly 121 hinge bracket 121a mounting piece 121b protruding piece 122 door frame upper hinge pin 123 flange member 124 lock spring 125 door frame lower hinge member 125a mounting piece 125b protruding piece 126 door frame lower hinge pin

130 Cylinder lock 131 Cylinder body 132 Keyhole 133 Rotation transmission member

140 Ball feeding unit 141 Front cover 141a Advance entrance 141b Ball pulling port 141c Slit 141e Ball throwing opening 142 Rear cover 142a Ball feeding port 142b Mounting recess 143 Ball pulling member 143a Partition part 143b Rotating paddle part 143c Ball feeding member 144a Blocking part 144b Ball holding part 144c Paddle part 145 Ball feeding solenoid 146 Ball feeding operating rod 146a Iron plate 147 Ball feeding crank 147a Engaging part 147b Shaft part 147c Transmission part

150 Foul cover unit 150a Penetration ball passage 150b Full tank ball socket 150c Foul ball socket 150d Ball discharge port 150e Storage passage 150f Door open / close contact part

151 Unit body 152 Lid member 153 Movable piece 154 Full tank detection sensor 155 Spring

160 Glass unit 161a Mounting piece 161b Locking piece 161 Glass frame 162 Glass plate 163 Glass unit mounting member 163b Protruding part 163a Base

170 Security cover 171 Main body 172 Rear protrusion 173 Locking piece

180 Handle unit 181 Handle base 181a Base 181b Front end 181c Groove 182 Handle 182a First protrusion 182b Second protrusion 182c Third protrusion 182d Fourth protrusion 182e Slit 182f Locking protrusion 183 Cover pedestal 183a Cover 186 Inner base 187 Shaft member 187a Drive gear 188 Transmission gear 189 Handle rotation detection sensor 189a Detection shaft 190 Handle return spring 191 Auxiliary spring 192 Handle touch sensor 193 Single-shot button 194 Single-shot button operation sensor

200 Plate unit 201 Upper plate 201a Guidance passage 201b Earth fitting 202 Lower plate 202a Lower plate ball through hole 210 Plate base unit 211 Plate unit base 211a Upper plate ball supply port 211b Speaker port 211c Lower plate ball supply port (opening for balls)
211d Notch 211e Upper plate ball feed port 211f Mounting protrusion 211g Slider insertion port 211h Handle insertion port 211i Cylinder insertion port 211a Upper plate ball supply port

212 Upper plate body 212a Production operation unit mounting part 213 Mounting base 213a Insertion port 213b Through port 214 Plate unit relay board 220 Ball rental operation unit 221 Base part 222 Upper plate ball removal button 223 Ball rental operation base 224 Ball rental button 224a Ball rental Button pressing part 224b Ball lending button housing part 224c Ball lending button spring 224d Ball lending button micro switch 224e Ball lending button housing opening 225 Return button 225a Return button pressing part 225b Return button housing part 225c Return button spring 225d Return button micro Switch 226 Ball rental display 226a 7-segment LED
226b Ball rental status display LED
226c Ball rental display board 227 Ball rental board 228 Ball rental board case 228a Ball rental board case opening 229a Conductive part 229b Earth wire 230 Upper plate ball removal unit 231 Front base 232 Front slider 240 Upper plate ball removal unit 241 Rear base 241a Ball receiving port 241b Ball feeding guide path 241c Ball pulling guide path 242 Upper plate ball pulling slider 242a Actuating receiver 242b Actuating transmission unit 243 Spring 244 Rear cover 250 Dish decoration unit 251 Lower plate body 252 Dish unit body 252a Upper side swelling Exit 252b Lower front decoration 252c Bottom plate 252d Lower plate opening 252e Front notch 252f Bottom notch 252g Handle insertion port 252h Cylinder insertion port 252i Production operation unit mounting part 260 Lower plate ball removal unit 261 Lower plate ball removal base 262 Slider 263 Lower plate ball removal button 264 Spring 265 Lower plate ball removal lid 266 Holding mechanism 270 Plate upper left decoration unit 271 Plate upper left decoration 272 Plate upper left reflector 273 Plate upper left decorative board 275 Plate upper right decoration unit 276 Plate upper right decoration 277 Plate upper right Reflector 278 Dish upper right decorative board 280 Dish lower left decorative unit 281 Dish lower left decorative unit 281 Dish lower left decorative board 283 Dish lower left decorative board 285 Dish lower right decorative unit 286 Dish lower right decorative unit 287 Dish lower right reflector 288 Dish lower right decorative board

300 Production operation unit 301 Production operation unit 302 Rotation operation unit 303 Pressing operation unit 303a Central pressing operation unit 303b Outer peripheral pressing operation unit 310 Production operation unit Cover unit 311 Unit lower cover 311a Drain hole 312 Unit front cover 312a Dish center upper decoration body 312b Dish center lower decoration 313 Dish center upper reflector 314 Dish center upper decoration board 315 Dish center lower reflector 316 Dish center lower decoration board 320 Operation unit base 321 Main body 321a Bottom wall 321b Through hole 322 Flange 323 Leg 324 Upper mounting part 325 Gear bearing part 325 Gear bearing part 330 Production operation ring 331 Ring mounting base 331a Mounting part 331b Boss part 331c Through port 332 Rotating base 332a Ring gear 332b Eccentric motor 333 Bush 334 Ring retaining member 335 Ring outer surface Part 335b Decorative part 335c Outer upper cover mounting part 336 Ring outer lower cover 336a Outer lower surface part 336b Outer lower cover mounting part 337 Ring inner cover 337a Inner surface part 337b Cylinder surface part 337c Inner cover mounting part 340 Rotation drive unit 341 Rotation drive Base 342 Operation ring Drive motor 343 Drive gear 344 Speed change gear 344a First gear 344b Second gear 345 Transmission detection gear member 345a Gear part 345b Detection piece 346 Gear cover 347 First rotation detection sensor 348 Second rotation detection sensor 349 Sensor cover 350a Ring side gear part 350b Drive side gear part 351 Gear mounting member 352 Production operation ring decoration board 352a Front decoration board 352b Rear decoration board 352i Production operation unit mounting part 353 Decorative board cover 353a Front board cover 354 Vibration speaker

360 Direction operation button unit 361 Button unit base 361a Base body 361b Leg 362 Guide shaft 363 Upper base 364 Lifting base 364a Guide hole 364b Central hole 364c Standing wall part 364d Guide pin 365 Lifting spring 366 Central shaft 367 Operation button Lifting drive motor 367 Button Lifting drive motor terminal 368 Lifting drive gear 369 Driven gear 370 Lifting cam drive gear member 370a Gear part 370b Connecting part 370c Lifting detection piece 371 Lifting cam member 371a Cam part 371b First cam 371c Locking part 371d Second cam 371e Third Cam 371f Connected part 372 Gear cover 373 Central button body 373a Cylinder part 373b Bottom part 373c Guide hole 373d Central port 373e Press detection piece 373f Guide boss 374 Button spring 375 Central button cover 375a Top plate part 375a Top plate part 375b Center Button decorative board 378 Outer circuit board cover 378a Substrate 378b Cylindrical part 379 Outer peripheral decorative lens 380 Outer peripheral button cover 380a Cylindrical part 380b Ring part 381 Pressurization detection sensor 382 Elevation detection sensor 390 Operation part Relay board unit 391 Board box 391a Motor cover part 391b Board box opening 391c Waterproof wall 392 Operation part relay board 392a Operation part relay board Connector part 393 Board box cover 393a Board box cover Liquid induction part

400 Door frame left side unit 401 Door frame left side base 402 Frame left side decorative board 403 Left side reflector 404 Door frame left side decorative body 402a Left side upper decorative board 402b Left side lower decorative board 403a Through hole 410 Door frame right side unit 410a Side window 410b Side window interior decoration 411 Door frame right side base 412 Side window interior decoration member 412a Connection base 413 Side window interior decoration board 414 Internal reflector 415 Right side reflector 415a Through hole 416 Door frame right side outer panel 416a Door frame right side inner panel 417a Door frame right side decorative board 418a Right side upper decorative board 418b Right side lower decorative board 419 Door frame right side decorative body

450 Door frame top unit 451 Door frame top base 451a Main body 451b Front protrusion 452 Top top cover 452a Opening 453 Door frame top decoration 454 Door frame top bottom plate 454a Reinforcing rib 454b Central speaker port 454c Side speaker port 455 Door frame top Central decorative board 456 Door frame top left decorative board 457 Door frame top right decorative board 458 Top center reflector 459 Top left reflector 460 Top right reflector 461 Central speaker box 462 Top center speaker 463 Speaker bracket 464 Top side speaker 465 Top bottom cover 466 Bottom Cover frame 467 Door frame top Relay board 468 Door frame top Top plate

500 Body frame base unit 501 Body frame base 501a Base body 501b Game board insertion port 501c Game board mounting part 501d Game board regulation part 501e Launcher mounting part 501f Cylinder insertion port 501g Speaker opening 501h Cable mounting recess 501i Cable insertion port 501j Rear extension 501k Upper hinge mounting 501l Lower hinge mounting

502 Connection cable guide member 502 Connection cable guide member 502a Guide body 502b Frame piece 502c Mounting shaft 502d Through hole 503 Connection cable 504 Binding band 505 Game board lock member 510 Main body frame upper hinge member 520 Main body frame lower hinge assembly 521 Lower hinge 1 Main body 521a Lower hinge hole for outer frame 522 Lower hinge 2nd main body 522a Lower hinge hole for door frame 522b Control piece 530 Body frame reinforcement frame 531 Left position control member 540 Ball launcher 541 Launch base 542 Launch solenoid 543 Launch hammer 544 Launch Rail 550 Payout base unit 551 Payout base 551a Top plate part 551b Left side plate part 551c Right side plate part 551d Back plate upper part 551e Back plate left part 551f Inner plate part 551g Bottom plate part 551h Connection plate part 551i Back cover mounting part 551i Ball tank 552a Mounting part 552b Mounting part 552c Mounting part 552d Mounting part 552e Mounting part 555 Tank rail 554 First rail cover 555 Second rail cover 556 Ball rectifying member 557 Ball stop member 558 External terminal board 558a Case part 559 Earth circuit board Discharge unit 570 Ball guidance unit 570a Guidance passage 571 Guidance unit base 57 2 Guidance passage front lid 573 Movable piece member 574 Ball cut detection sensor 580 Discharge device 580a Discharge passage 580b Ball withdrawal passage 581 Discharge device Main body 581a Main body side guide wall 582 Lid 582a Rear lid side guide wall 583 Discharge device Front lid 584 Discharge motor 585 Drive gear 586 1st transmission gear 587 2nd transmission gear 588 Discharge gear member 588a Discharge gear 588b Detection piece 589 Discharge blade 589a Wing piece 589b Rotation detection sensor 591 Payout detection sensor 592 Ball pulling movable piece 593 Ball pulling lever ER1, ER2 Earth resistance

600 Upper full tank path unit 600a Upper full ball receiving passage 600b Upper ball storage passage 600c Upper normal payout passage 600d Upper full tank payout passage 600e Upper full tank removal passage 601 Upper full tank base 601a Back cover mounting part 602 Upper full tank cover 603 Device pressing member 610 Lower full tank path unit 610a Lower normal payout passage 610b Lower full tank payout passage 610c Lower ball removal passage 611 Lower full tank base 612 Lower full tank cover 613 Lower full tank cover 613 Lower full tank opening / closing door 613a Acting protrusion 614 Closing spring

620 Board unit 620a Speaker unit 620b Base unit 620c Power supply unit 620d Payout control unit 620e Interface unit 621 Speaker cover 621a Speaker mounting part 621b Front recess for space 621c Connection part 621d Through cylinder 622 Main body frame Speaker 623 Speaker box 623 Front base 626 Rear base 627 Ball withdrawal guide 628 Outlet ball receiving part 629 Ball outlet 630 Power supply board 631 Power supply board cover 632 Payout control board box 633 Payout control board 634 Board base 635 Interface board 636 Interface board cover 640 Back cover 650 Locking Unit 651 Unit base 652 Door frame hook 653 Outer frame hook 654 Transmission cylinder 655 Lock spring 656 Outer frame unlock lever

700 1st operation line invalidation member 7000 2nd operation line invalidation member 7000D Dynamic operation line invalidation member B Game ball Q Illegal ball L Operation line

1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guide part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Out port 1009 Security recess 1010 Notch part 1012 Launch passage part 1013 Foul ball drop port 1014 Return passage Part 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1112 Opening 1120 Panel holder 1121 Throughout 1122 Notch

1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge unit 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status display 1402 Normal symbol display 1403 Normal hold display 1404 First special symbol display 1405 First special hold number Indicator 1406 Second special symbol indicator 1407 Second special hold number indicator 1408 Round indicator

1500 Peripheral Control Unit 1510 Peripheral Control Board 1511 Peripheral Control Unit 1512 Production Control Unit 1520 Peripheral Control Board Box

1600 production display device (also called game board side production display device)
1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece

2000 Table unit 2001 General winning port 2002 First starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 Second starting port 2005 Large winning port 2100 Starting port unit 2200 Side unit

2400 Attacker unit 2401 Gate sensor 2402 Second start port sensor 2403 Grand prize opening sensor 2404 Start port solenoid 2405 Attacker solenoid

2500 Center accessory 2501 Warp entrance 2502 Warp exit 2503 Stage 2600 Table production unit

3000 Back unit 3001 General winning opening sensor 3002 First starting opening sensor 3003 Magnetic sensor

3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d Notch 3010e Fixed piece part 3020 Lock mechanism 3031 Panel relay board (Drive board in Fig. 169)
3100 back production unit

4000 detection sensor unit (origin position detection sensor unit in FIG. 169)
4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input unit 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Avoidance unit 4167 Avoidance unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4200 Game ball guide path unit 4510 Avoidance unit unit STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR contact resistance CON2 connector CON3 connector member CON4 connector member 4504-4506 connector member 5000 accessory group 01
5002 Character group 02
5004 Character group 03
5006 Character group 04
5008 Character Group 05
CN11 connector CN12 connector CN13 connector CN14 connector CN15 connector 5591 ground wire 5592 ground wire 5595 ground wire 5594 ground wire 5595 ground wire

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine provided with a main body frame, a door frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame, and an effect operation unit provided on the door frame.
As the effect operation unit, a first effect operation unit and a second effect operation unit are provided.
The second production operation unit is
It is possible to operate it on the circumference by the operation by the player, and a part of it is located on the player side of the first effect operation unit in the initial state.
It is possible to vibrate the second effect operation unit, and the second effect operation unit is provided with a vibration source that moves according to the operation by the player.
The second effect operation unit is operated by the player from the initial state on the circumference with the vibration source, and then operates on the circumference with the vibration source to return to the initial state. And
The first effect operation unit is a pressing operation unit that can be operated in a straight line by an operation by a player, unlike the operation of the second effect operation unit.
Said vibration source and said second staging operation unit and the first staging operation unit, Ri detachable der respect integrated with the door frame as an operating unit,
Further, the gaming machine is characterized in that the vibration source is arranged on the inner surface of a member that the player directly contacts among the members constituting the second effect operation unit.

Images